ARM r1p3 Computer Hardware User Manual

SECTION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PAGE
1
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
2
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
3
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
4
5
STARTING AND OPERATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
5
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
6
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
7
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
8
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
9
10
INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
10
INTRODUCTION
CONTENTS
䡵 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
䡵 Vehicle Identification Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
䡵 How To Use This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
䡵 Vehicle Modifications / Alterations . . . . . . . . . . 7
䡵 Warnings And Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
1
4
INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION
This manual has been prepared with the assistance of
service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with
the operation and maintenance of your new vehicle. It is
supplemented by a Warranty Information Booklet and
various customer oriented documents. You are urged to
read these publications carefully. Following the instructions and recommendations in this manual will help
assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
NOTE: After you read the manual, it should be stored
in the vehicle for convenient reference and remain with
the vehicle when sold, so that the new owner will be
aware of all safety warnings.
When it comes to service, remember that your dealer
knows your vehicle best, has the factory-trained technicians and genuine Mopar威 parts, and is interested in
your satisfaction.
WARNING!
Engine exhaust, some of its constituents and certain
vehicle components contain or emit chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects or other reproductive harm. In addition,
certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or emit chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects or other reproductive harm.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Consult the table of contents to determine which section
contains the information you desire.
The detailed index, at the rear of this manual, contains a
complete listing of all subjects.
Consult the following table for a description of the
symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout
this owner’s manual:
INTRODUCTION
5
1
6
INTRODUCTION
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
This manual contains WARNINGS against operating
procedures, which could result in an accident or bodily
injury. It also contains CAUTIONS against procedures,
which could result in damage to your vehicle. If you do
not read this entire manual, you may miss important
information. Observe all Warnings and Cautions.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The vehicle identification number (VIN) is on the left
front corner of the instrument panel. The VIN is visible
from outside of the vehicle through the windshield. This
number also appears on the Automobile Information
Disclosure Label affixed to a window on your vehicle, the
vehicle registration, and the title.
VIN LOCATION
NOTE: It is illegal to remove the VIN.
INTRODUCTION
7
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS / ALTERATIONS
1
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle
could seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety
and may lead to an accident resulting in serious
injury or death.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2
CONTENTS
䡵 A Word About Your Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11
䡵 Illuminated Entry System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
▫ Ignition Key Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11
䡵 Remote Keyless Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
▫ Key-In-Ignition Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
▫ To Unlock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
䡵 Sentry Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
▫ To Lock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
▫ Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13
▫ To Unlatch The Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
▫ Customer Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
▫ Using The Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
▫ Programming Additional Transmitters . . . . . . . .19
䡵 Security Alarm System — If Equipped . . . . . . .15
▫ Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
▫ Rearming Of The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
▫ To Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
䡵 Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
▫ To Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
▫ Manual Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
10
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
▫ Seat Belts And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . .37
▫ Child Protection Door Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
▫ Seat Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
䡵 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
▫ Driver And Front Passenger Supplemental
Restraint System (SRS) - Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . .38
▫ Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
䡵 Trunk Lock And Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
䡵 Trunk Safety Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
▫ Trunk Emergency Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
䡵 Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
▫ Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
▫ Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure . . . . .35
▫ Seat Belt Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
▫ Enhanced Seat Belt Reminder System
(BeltAlert) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
▫ Automatic Locking Mode — If Equipped . . . . .36
▫ Event Data Recorder (EDR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
▫ Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
䡵 Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55
䡵 Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56
▫ Transporting Passengers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56
▫ Lock Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56
▫ Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56
▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57
▫ Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make
Outside The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS
You can insert the double-sided keys into the locks with
either side up.
11
Ignition Key Removal
The shift lever must be in PARK. Turn the key to the
LOCK position, and then remove the key.
Vehicle Key
Ignition Key Positions
The dealer that sold you your new vehicle has the key
code numbers for your vehicle locks. These numbers can
be used to order duplicate keys from your dealer. Ask
your dealer for these numbers and keep them in a safe
place.
NOTE: The power window switches, radio, power
sunroof (if equipped), and power outlets will remain
active for up to 60 minutes after the ignition switch is
turned off. Opening either front door will cancel this
feature. The time for this feature is programmable. For
details, refer to “Delay Power Off to Accessories Until
2
12
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Exit,” under “Personal Settings (Customer Programmable Features),” under “Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC)” in Section 4 of this manual.
Key-In-Ignition Reminder
If you open the driver’s door and the key is in the ignition
switch, a chime will sound to remind you to remove the
key.
WARNING!
NOTE: The Key-In-Ignition reminder only sounds
when the ignition key is placed in the LOCK or ACC
positions.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
children in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Don’t leave the keys in
the ignition. A child could operate power windows,
other controls, or move the vehicle.
CAUTION!
An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves. Always
remove key from the ignition and lock all doors
when leaving the vehicle unattended.
SENTRY KEY
The Sentry Key Immobilizer System prevents unauthorized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The
system does not need to be armed or activated. Operation
is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked
or unlocked.
The system uses ignition keys, which have an embedded
electronic chip (transponder), to prevent unauthorized
vehicle operation. Therefore, only keys that are programmed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate
the vehicle. The system will shut the engine off in two (2)
seconds if someone uses an invalid key to start the
engine.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: A key, which has not been programmed, is also
considered an invalid key even if it is cut to fit the
ignition lock cylinder for that vehicle.
During normal operation, after turning on the ignition
switch, the Vehicle Security Alarm Indicator Light will
turn on for three (3) seconds for a bulb check. If the light
remains on after the bulb check, it indicates that there is
a problem with the electronics. In addition, if the light
begins to flash after the bulb check, it indicates that
someone used an invalid key to start the engine. Either of
these conditions will result in the engine being shut off
after two (2) seconds.
If the Vehicle Security Alarm Indicator Light turns on
during normal vehicle operation (vehicle running for
longer than 10 seconds), it indicates that there is a fault in
the electronics. Should this occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible.
NOTE:
• The Sentry Key Immobilizer System is not compatible
with remote starting systems. Use of these systems
may result in vehicle starting problems and loss of
security protection.
13
• Exxon/Mobil Speed Pass,™ additional Sentry Keys, or
any other transponder-equipped components on the
same key chain will not cause a key-related (transponder) fault unless the additional part is physically held against the ignition key being used
when starting the vehicle. Cell phones, pagers, or
other RF electronics will not cause interference with
this system.
All of the keys provided with your new vehicle have
been programmed to the vehicle electronics.
Replacement Keys
NOTE: Only keys that are programmed to the vehicle
electronics can be used to start and operate the vehicle.
Once a Sentry Key is programmed to a vehicle, it cannot
be programmed to any other vehicle.
At the time of purchase, the original owner is provided
with a four-digit PIN number. This number is required
for dealer replacement of keys. Duplication of keys may
be performed at an authorized dealer or by using the
Customer Key Programming procedure. This procedure
2
14
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
consists of programming a blank key to the vehicle
electronics. A blank key is one, which has never been
programmed.
NOTE: When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer
System serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to the
dealer.
Customer Key Programming
If you have two valid sentry keys, you can program new
sentry keys to the system by performing the following
procedure:
1. Cut the additional Sentry Key Transponder blank(s) to
match the ignition switch lock cylinder key code.
2. Insert the first valid key into the ignition switch and
turn the ignition switch ON for at least 3 seconds but no
longer than 15 seconds. Turn the ignition switch OFF and
remove the first key.
3. Insert the second valid key and turn the ignition
switch ON within 15 seconds. After ten seconds, a chime
will sound and the Vehicle Security Alarm Indicator
Light will begin to flash. Turn the ignition switch OFF
and remove the second key.
4. Insert a blank Sentry Key into the ignition switch and
turn the ignition switch ON within 60 seconds. After 10
seconds, a single chime will sound and the Vehicle
Security Alarm Indicator Light will stop flashing, turn on
again for 3 seconds, and then turn off.
The new Sentry Key is programmed. The Keyless Entry
Transmitter will also be programmed during this procedure.
Repeat this procedure to program up to 8 keys. If you do
not have a programmed sentry key, contact your dealer
for details.
NOTE: If a programmed key is lost, see your dealer to
have all remaining keys erased from the systems
memory. This will prevent the lost key from starting your
vehicle. The remaining keys must then be reprogrammed. All vehicle keys must be taken to the dealer at
the time of service to be reprogrammed.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
General Information
The Sentry Key system complies with FCC rules part 15
and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is
subject to the following conditions:
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
• This device must accept any interference that may be
received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
SECURITY ALARM SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
The Vehicle Security Alarm system monitors the vehicle
doors for unauthorized entry and the ignition switch for
unauthorized operation. If something triggers the alarm,
the system will prevent the vehicle from starting and
provide the following audible and visual signals: the
horn will pulse; the headlights will flash; the park lights
will flash; and the Vehicle Security Alarm Indicator light
in the instrument cluster will flash.
15
Rearming of the System:
If something triggers the alarm, and no action is taken to
disarm it, the system will turn off the horn after 3
minutes, turn off all of the visual signals after 15 minutes,
and then the system will rearm itself.
To Arm the System:
Remove the key from the ignition switch and either press
a power door lock switch while the driver or passenger
door is open or press the LOCK button on the keyless
entry transmitter. After the last door is closed, or if all
doors are closed, the system will arm itself in about 16
seconds. During that time, the Vehicle Security Alarm
Indicator light will flash. If it does not illuminate, the
system is not arming. Also, if you open a door during the
arming period, the system will cancel the arming process.
If you wish to rearm the system after closing the door,
you must repeat one of the previously described arming
sequences.
2
16
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To Disarm the System:
Either press the UNLOCK button on the remote keyless
entry transmitter or insert a valid sentry key into the
ignition lock cylinder and turn the key to the ON/START
position.
NOTE:
• The driver’s door key cylinder and the trunk button on
the keyless entry transmitter cannot arm or disarm the
system.
• The system remains armed during trunk entry. Pressing the trunk button will not disarm the system. If
someone enters the vehicle through the trunk and
opens any door the alarm will sound.
• When the system is armed, the interior power door
lock switches will not unlock the doors.
The Vehicle Security Alarm system is designed to protect
your vehicle; however, you can create conditions where
the system will give you a false alarm. If one of the
previously described arming sequences has occurred, the
system will arm regardless of whether you are in the
vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle and open a
door, the alarm will sound. If this occurs, disarm the
system.
If the alarm system is armed and the battery becomes
disconnected the system will remain armed when the
battery is reconnected. The exterior lights will flash, the
horn will sound, and the ignition will not start the
vehicle. If this occurs, disarm the system.
Tamper Alert
If something has triggered the system in your absence,
the horn will sound three times when you disarm the
system. Check the vehicle for tampering.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
ILLUMINATED ENTRY SYSTEM
The courtesy lights will turn on when you use the keyless
entry transmitter or open the doors.
The lights will fade to off after about 30 seconds or they
will immediately fade to off once the ignition switch is
turned ON from the LOCK position.
NOTE:
• None of the courtesy lights will operate if the dimmer
control is in the “defeat” position (extreme downward
position), unless the overhead map/reading lights are
turned on manually.
17
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY
This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors, open
the trunk, or activate the panic alarm from distances up
to about 23 feet (7 meters) using a hand held radio
transmitter. The transmitter need not be pointed at the
vehicle to activate the system.
NOTE: Inserting the key into the ignition switch disables all buttons on that transmitter; however, the buttons on the remaining transmitters will continue to work.
Shifting the vehicle out of PARK disables all transmitter
buttons for all keys.
Keyless Entry Transmitter
2
18
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To unlock the doors:
Press and release the UNLOCK button on the transmitter
once to unlock the driver’s door, or twice to unlock all
doors. The turn signal lights will flash to acknowledge
the unlock signal. The illuminated entry system will also
turn on.
Remote Key Unlock, Driver Door/All Doors First
This feature lets you program the system to unlock either
the driver’s door or all doors on the first press of the
UNLOCK button on the transmitter. For details on how
to change the current setting, refer to “Remote Key
Unlock,” under “Personal Settings (Customer Programmable Features),” under “Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC)” in Section 4 of this manual.
Flash Lights with Remote Key Lock
This feature will cause the turn signal lights to flash when
the doors are locked or unlocked with the transmitter.
This feature can be enabled or disabled. For details on
how to change the current setting, refer to “Flash Lights
with Remote Key Lock,” under ⬙Personal Settings (Customer Programmable Features),” under “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in Section 4 of this
manual.
Turn Headlights On with Remote Key Unlock
This feature activates the headlights for up to 90 seconds
when the doors are unlocked with the transmitter. The
time for this feature is programmable. For details on how
to change the current setting, refer to “Turn Headlights
On with Remote Key Unlock,” under “Personal Settings
(Customer Programmable Features),” under “Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in Section 4 of this
manual.
To lock the doors:
Press and release the LOCK button on the transmitter to
lock all doors. The turn signal lights will flash and the
horn will chirp to acknowledge the signal.
Sound Horn with Remote Key Lock
This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors
are locked with the transmitter. This feature can be
enabled or disabled. For details on how to change the
current setting, refer to “Sound Horn with Remote Key
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Lock,” under “Personal Settings (Customer Programmable Features),” under “Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC)” in Section 4 of this manual.
To unlatch the trunk:
Press the trunk button on the transmitter two times to
unlatch the trunk.
Using The Panic Alarm:
To turn the panic alarm feature ON or OFF, press and
hold the PANIC button on the transmitter for at least one
second and release. When the panic alarm is on, the
headlights and park lights will flash, the horn will pulse
on and off, and the interior lights will turn on.
The panic alarm will stay on for 3 minutes unless you
turn it off by either pressing the PANIC button a second
time or drive the vehicle at a speed of 15 mph (24 km/h)
or greater.
NOTE:
• The interior lights will turn off if you turn the ignition
switch to the ACC or ON position while the panic
alarm is activated. However, the exterior lights and
horn will remain on.
19
• You may need to be less than 23 feet (7 meters) from
the vehicle when using the transmitter to turn off the
panic alarm due to the radio frequency noises emitted
by the system.
Programming Additional Transmitters
Refer to SENTRY KEY “Customer Key Programming.”
(See page 14 for more information.)
If you do not have a programmed transmitter, contact
your dealer for details.
Battery Replacement
The recommended replacement battery is CR2032.
NOTE: Do not touch the battery terminals that are on
the back housing or the printed circuit board.
1. With the transmitter buttons facing downward, remove the small screw (if equipped).
2. Separate the two halves of the transmitter with a flat
blade tool. Do not damage the rubber seal during removal.
2
20
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
General Information
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
• This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Separating Transmitter Halves
3. Remove and replace the battery. Avoid touching the
new battery with your fingers. Skin oils may cause
battery deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean it with
rubbing alcohol.
4. To assemble the transmitter case, snap the two halves
together. If so equipped, install and tighten the screw
until snug. Make sure there is an even “gap” between the
two halves.
5. Test the transmitter operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
If your Remote Keyless Entry transmitter fails to operate
from a normal distance, check for these two conditions.
1. A weak battery in the transmitter. The expected life of
the battery is a minimum of three years.
2. Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station
tower, airport transmitter, and some mobile or CB radios.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
DOOR LOCKS
21
WARNING!
Manual Door Locks
To lock each door, push the door lock plunger on each
door trim panel downward. To unlock each door, pull the
door lock plunger on each door trim panel upward.
Door Lock Plunger
If the door lock plunger is down when you shut the door,
the door will lock. Therefore, make sure the keys are not
inside the vehicle before closing the door.
• For personal security and safety in the event of an
accident, lock the vehicle doors as you drive as
well as when you park and leave the vehicle.
• When leaving the vehicle always remove the key
from the ignition lock, and lock your vehicle.
Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may
cause severe personal injuries and death.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
children in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for
a number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Don’t leave the keys
in the ignition. A child could operate power
windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
Power Door Locks
A power door lock switch is on each front door trim
panel. Use this switch to lock or unlock the doors.
2
22
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Automatic Door Locks
The doors will lock automatically on vehicles with power
door locks if all of the following conditions are met:
1. The Automatic Door Locks feature is enabled.
2. The transmission is in gear.
3. All doors are closed.
4. The throttle is pressed.
5. The vehicle speed is above 15 mph (24 km/h).
Power Door Lock Switch
If you press the power door lock switch while the key is
in the ignition, and any front door is open, the power
locks will not operate. This prevents you from accidentally locking your keys in the vehicle. Removing the key
or closing the door will allow the locks to operate. A
chime will sound if the key is in the LOCK or ACC
position and a door is open, as a reminder to remove the
key.
6. The doors were not previously locked using the power
door lock switch or remote keyless entry transmitter.
Automatic Door Locks Programming
The Automatic Door Locks feature can be enabled or
disabled. For details, refer to “Lock Doors Automatically
at 15 mph (24 Km/h),” under “Personal Settings (Customer Programmable Features),” under “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in Section 4 of this
manual.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Automatic Unlock Doors on Exit
The doors will unlock automatically on vehicles with
power door locks if:
1. The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature is enabled.
2. The transmission was in gear and the vehicle speed
returned to 0 mph (0 km/h).
3. The transmission is in NEUTRAL or PARK.
23
Child Protection Door Lock
To provide a safer environment for small children riding
in the rear seats, the rear doors are equipped with a child
protection door lock system.
To Engage the Child Protection Door Lock
1. Open the rear door.
2. Insert the tip of the vehicle’s ignition key or alike into
the child lock control and pull it upward.
4. The driver door is opened.
5. The doors were not previously unlocked.
6. The vehicle speed is 0 mph (0 km/h).
Automatic Unlock Doors on Exit Programming
The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature can be
enabled or disabled. For details, refer to “Unlock Doors
Automatically on Exit, ” under “Personal Settings (Customer Programmable Features),” under “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in Section 4 of this
manual.
Child Lock Control
2
24
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 on the opposite rear door.
To Disengage the Child Protection Door Lock
NOTE: When the child lock system is engaged, the door
can be opened only by using the outside door handle
even though the inside door lock is in the unlocked
position.
1. Open the rear door.
2. Insert the tip of the vehicle’s ignition key or alike into
the child lock control and pull it downward.
WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision.
Remember that the rear doors can only be opened
from the outside when the child protection locks are
engaged.
NOTE:
• After engaging the child protection door lock system,
always test the door from the inside to make certain it
is in the desired position.
• For emergency exit with the system engaged, move
the door lock switch to the UNLOCK position, roll
down the window and open the door with the outside
door handle.
Child Lock Control
3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 on the opposite rear door.
NOTE: After disengaging the child protection door lock
system, always test the door from the inside to make
certain it is in the desired position.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WINDOWS
25
WARNING!
Power Windows
The window controls on the driver’s door control all the
door windows.
Never leave children in a vehicle, with the keys in
the ignition switch. Occupants, particularly unattended children, can become entrapped by the windows while operating the power window switches.
Such entrapment may result in serious injury or
death.
Auto Down Feature
The driver door power window switch, and some model
passenger door power window switches have an auto
down feature. Press the window switch to the second
detent, release, and the window will go down automatically.
Power Window Switches
There are single window controls on each passenger door
trim panel, which operate the passenger door windows.
The window controls will operate only when the ignition
switch is in the ON or ACCESSORY position.
To open the window part way, press the window switch
to the first detent and release it when you want the
window to stop.
To stop the window from going all the way down during
the auto-down operation, pull up on the switch briefly.
2
26
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The power window switches will remain active for up to
60 minutes after the ignition switch is turned off. Opening either front door will cancel this feature. The time for
this feature is programmable. For details, refer to “Delay
Power Off to Accessories Until Exit,” under “Personal
Settings (Customer Programmable Features),” under
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in Section 4 of this manual.
Auto Up Feature with Anti–Pinch Protection — If
Equipped
Lift the window switch to the second detent, release, and
the window will go up automatically.
To stop the window from going all the way up during the
auto-up operation, push down on the switch briefly.
To close the window part way, lift the window switch to
the first detent and release it when you want the window
to stop.
The power window switches will remain active for up to
60 minutes after the ignition switch is turned off. Opening either front door will cancel this feature. The time for
this feature is programmable. For details, refer to “Delay
Power Off to Accessories Until Exit,” under “Personal
Settings (Customer Programmable Features),” under
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in Section 4 of this manual.
NOTE:
• If the window runs into any obstacle during autoclosure, it will reverse direction and then stop. Remove
the obstacle and use the window switch again to close
the window.
• Any impact due to rough road conditions may trigger
the auto reverse function unexpectedly during autoclosure. If this happens, pull the switch lightly to the
first detent and hold to close window manually.
WARNING!
There is no anti-pinch protection when the window
is almost closed. Be sure to clear all objects from the
window before closing.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Window Lockout Switch
The window lockout switch on the driver’s door allows
you to disable the window controls on the passenger
doors. When the switch is pressed, the window controls
on the passenger doors will not illuminate and the
passenger windows will be disabled.
27
Reset
Any time the vehicle battery is disconnected, or goes
dead, the auto-up function will be disabled. To reactivate
the auto-up feature, perform the following steps after
vehicle power is restored:
1. Pull the window switch up to close window completely and continue to hold the switch up for an
additional two seconds after the window is closed.
2. Push the window switch down firmly to the second
detent to open the window completely and continue to
hold the switch down for an additional two seconds after
the window is fully open.
Window Lockout Switch
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
the rear windows open, then open the front and rear
windows together to minimize the buffeting. If the
2
28
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, then adjust the
sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting.
TRUNK LOCK AND RELEASE
The trunk lid can be released from inside the vehicle by
pressing the Trunk Release Button located on the instrument panel to the left of the steering wheel.
NOTE: The transmission must be in Park before the
switch will operate.
Trunk Release Button
The trunk lid can be released from outside the vehicle by
pressing the trunk button on the Remote Keyless Entry
Transmitter two times.
With the ignition ON, the trunk open symbol will display
in the instrument cluster indicating that the trunk is
open. The odometer display will reappear once the trunk
is closed.
With the key in the lock position or key out, the trunk
open symbol will display until the trunk is closed.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
TRUNK SAFETY WARNING
29
Trunk Emergency Release
WARNING!
2
Do not allow children to have access to the trunk,
either by climbing into the trunk from outside, or
through the inside of the vehicle. Always close the
trunk lid when your vehicle is unattended. Once in
the trunk, young children may not be able to escape,
even if they entered through the rear seat. If trapped
in the trunk, children can die from suffocation or
heat stroke.
Emergency Release
The trunk of your vehicle is equipped with an emergency
release handle. It is located on the inside of the trunk lid,
near the latch, and is coated so that it glows in a darkened
trunk. Pull on the handle to open the trunk.
30
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS
Some of the most important safety features in your
vehicle are the restraint systems. These include the front
and rear seat belts for the driver and all passengers, front
airbags for both the driver and front passenger and, if so
equipped, side curtain airbags for the driver and passengers seated next to a window. If you will be carrying
children too small for adult-size belts, your seat belts also
can be used to hold infant and child restraint systems.
Please pay close attention to the information in this
section. It tells you how to use your restraint system
properly to keep you and your passengers as safe as
possible.
WARNING!
In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer
much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or
other passengers, or you can be thrown out of the
vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your
vehicle are buckled up properly.
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even
on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver
and cause a collision that includes you. This can happen
far away from home or on your own street.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they
can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some
of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown
from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of
ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the
inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should
be belted at all times.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with
Lap/Shoulder Belts.
The belt webbing retractor is designed to lock during
very sudden stops or impacts. This feature allows the
shoulder part of the belt to move freely with you under
normal conditions. However, in a collision, the belt will
lock and reduce your risk of striking the inside of the
vehicle or being thrown out.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and
adjust the front seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of your seat.
Grasp the latch plate and pull out the belt. Slide the latch
plate up the webbing as far as necessary to make the belt
go around your lap.
using a seat belt properly.
• Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous. Seat
belts are designed to go around the large bones of
your body. These are the strongest parts of your body
and can take the forces of a collision the best.
• Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make
your injuries in a collision much worse. You might
suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out
of part of the belt. Follow these instructions to wear
your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers
safe, too.
• Two people should never be belted into a single seat
belt. People belted together can crash into one another in an accident, hurting one another badly.
Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more
than one person, no matter what their size.
31
Pulling Out Lap/Shoulder Belt
2
32
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
3. When the belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
Connecting Latch Plate To Buckle
WARNING!
• A belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will
not protect you properly. The lap portion could ride
too high on your body, possibly causing internal
injuries. Always buckle your belt into the buckle
nearest you.
• A belt that is too loose will not protect you as well.
In a sudden stop, you could move too far forward,
increasing the possibility of injury. Wear your seat
belt snugly.
• A belt that is worn under your arm is very
dangerous. Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the vehicle in a collision, increasing head
and neck injury. A belt worn under the arm can cause
internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder
bones. Wear the belt over your shoulder so that your
strongest bones will take the force in a collision.
• A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect
you from injury during a collision. You are more
likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not
wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt
are meant to be used together.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
4. Position the lap belt across your thighs, below your
abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull up
a bit on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too
tight, tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug
belt reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in a
collision.
33
WARNING!
• A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of
internal injury in a collision. The belt forces won’t
be at the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your
abdomen. Always wear the lap belt as low as possible and keep it snug.
• A twisted belt can’t do its job as well. In a
collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the belt
is straight. If you can’t straighten a belt in your
vehicle, take it to your dealer and have it fixed.
5. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is
comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor
will withdraw any slack in the belt.
Removing Slack From Belt
6. To release the belt, push the red button on the buckle.
The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position.
If necessary, slide the latch plate down the webbing to
allow the belt to retract fully.
2
34
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision
and leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt
system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose
parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately.
Do not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt
assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they
have been damaged (bent retractor, torn webbing,
etc.).
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
In the driver and front passenger seats, the shoulder belt
can be adjusted upward or downward to position the belt
away from your neck. Push and fully depress the button
above the webbing to release the anchorage, and then
move it up or down to the position that serves you best.
NOTE: When the shoulder belt is adjusted to the full
downward position, it will not be at the bottom of the slot
in the Trim Panel. This is normal, and the intended lowest
position.
Adjusting Upper Shoulder Belt
As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will
prefer a lower position, and if you are taller than average,
you will prefer a higher position. When you release the
anchorage, try to move it up and down to make sure that
it is locked in position.
In the rear seat, move toward the center of the seat to
position the belt away from your neck.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
35
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/
shoulder belt.
NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper
seat belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still
must be worn snugly and positioned properly.
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the
anchor point.
The pretensioners are triggered by the Airbag Control
Module (refer to information on Airbags in this section).
Like the front airbags, the pretensioners are single use
items. After a collision that is severe enough to deploy
the airbags and pretensioners, both must be replaced.
2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm) above the latch
plate, grasp and twist the belt webbing 180° to create a
fold that begins immediately above the latch plate.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing.
The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of the
latch plate.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the
folded webbing.
Seat Belt Pretensioners
The seat belts for both front seating positions are
equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to
remove any slack from the seat belts in the event of a
collision. These devices improve the performance of the
seat belt system by assuring that the belt is tight about the
occupant in a collision. Pretensioners work for all size
occupants, including those in child restraints.
Enhanced Seat Belt Reminder System (BeltAlert)
If the driver’s seat belt has not been buckled within 60
seconds of starting the vehicle and if the vehicle speed is
greater than 5 mph (8 km/h), the Enhanced Warning
System (BeltAlert) will alert the driver to buckle their seat
belt. The driver should also instruct all other occupants to
buckle their seat belts. Once the warning is triggered, the
Enhanced Warning System (BeltAlert) will continue to
chime and flash the Seat Belt Reminder Light for 96
seconds or until the driver’s seat belt is buckled. The
Enhanced Warning System (BeltAlert) will be reactivated
if the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled for more than 10
seconds and the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph (8
km/h).
2
36
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
BeltAlert Programming
The Enhanced Warning System (BeltAlert) can be enabled or disabled by your authorized dealer or by
performing the following steps:
NOTE: Watch for the Seat Belt Reminder Light to turn
on while unbuckling the seat belt and turn off while
re-buckling the seat belt. It may be necessary to retract
the seat belt.
NOTE: DaimlerChrysler does not recommend deactivating the Enhanced Warning System (BeltAlert).
4. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. A
single chime will sound to signify that you have successfully completed the programming.
1. With all doors closed, and the ignition switch in any
position except ON or START, buckle the driver’s seat
belt.
2. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/ RUN position, but
do not start the engine. Wait for the Seat Belt Reminder
Light to turn off and then proceed to the next step.
NOTE: You must perform the following steps within 60
seconds of turning the ignition switch to the ON/ RUN
position.
3. Within 60 seconds of turning the ignition switch to the
ON/ RUN position, unbuckle and then re-buckle the
driver’s seat belt at least three times within 10 seconds,
ending with the seat belt buckled.
The Enhanced Warning System (BeltAlert) can be reactivated by repeating this procedure.
NOTE: When the Enhanced Warning System (BeltAlert)
is deactivated, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will continue
to illuminate as long as the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled.
Automatic Locking Mode — If Equipped
In this mode, the shoulder belt is automatically prelocked. However, the belt will still retract to remove slack
in the shoulder belt. Use The Automatic Locking Mode
any time a child safety seat is installed in a seating
position that has a seat belt with this feature. Seat belts
that have the Automatic Locking Mode feature have a
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
distinctive label on the webbing. Children 12 years old
and under should be properly restrained in the rear seat
whenever possible.
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until
the entire belt is extracted.
3. Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts, you will
here a clicking sound. This indicates the safety belt is
now in the automatic locking mode.
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap and shoulder belt and
allow it to retract completely to disengage the automatic
locking mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency) locking mode.
Seat Belts and Pregnant Women
We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts
throughout their pregnancy. Keeping the mother safe is
the best way to keep the baby safe.
37
Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt
across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible.
Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the
abdomen. That way the strong bones of the hips will take
the force if there is a collision.
Seat Belt Extender
If a seat belt is too short, even when fully extended, and
when the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage (if so
equipped) is in its lowest position, your dealer can
provide you with a seat belt extender. This extender
should be used only if the existing belt is not long
enough. When it is not required, remove the extender,
and store it.
WARNING!
Using a seat belt extender when not needed can
increase the risk of injury in a collision. Only use
when the seat belt is not long enough when it is
worn low and snug, and in the recommended seating
positions. Remove and store the extender when not
needed.
2
38
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Driver and Front Passenger Supplemental
Restraint System (SRS) - Airbag
This vehicle has front airbags for both the driver and
front passenger as a supplement to the seat belt restraint
systems. The driver’s airbag is mounted in the center of
the steering wheel. The passenger’s front airbag is
mounted in the instrument panel, above the glove compartment. The words SRS AIRBAG are embossed on the
airbag covers.
Front Airbag Components
NOTE: The front airbags are certified to the Federal
regulations that allow less forceful deployment.
The front airbags have a multistage inflator design. This
may allow the airbag to have different rates of inflation
that are based on collision severity.
This vehicle may also be equipped with side curtain
airbags to protect the driver and passengers sitting next
to a window. If the vehicle is equipped with side curtain
airbags, they are located above the side windows. Their
covers are also labeled SRS AIRBAG.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
39
WARNING!
• Do not put anything on or around the front airbag
covers or attempt to manually open them. You may
damage the airbags and you could be injured because the airbags are no longer functional. These
protective covers for the airbag cushions are designed to open only when the airbags are inflating.
• If your vehicle is equipped with side curtain airbags,
do not stack luggage or other cargo up high enough
to block the location of the side curtain airbag. The
area where the side curtain airbag is located should
remain free from any obstructions.
Window Airbag
NOTE: Airbag covers may not be obvious in the
interior trim; but they will open to allow airbag deployment.
• If your vehicle is equipped with side curtain airbags,
do not have any accessory items installed which will
alter the roof, including adding a sunroof to your
vehicle. Do not add roof racks that require permanent attachments (bolts or screws) for installation on
the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the roof of the
vehicle for any reason.
• Do not drill, cut or tamper with the knee bolster in
any way.
• Do not mount any accessories to the knee bolster
such as alarm lights, stereos, citizens band radios etc.
2
40
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Do not use a clothing bar mounted to the coat
hooks in this vehicle. A clothing bar will impede the
proper performance of the curtain airbags.
Along with the seat belts, front airbags work with the
instrument panel knee bolsters to provide improved
protection for the driver and front passenger. Side Curtain Airbags also work with seat belts to improve occupant protection.
The seat belts are designed to protect you in many types
of collisions. The front airbags deploy in moderate to
severe frontal collisions.
If your vehicle is so equipped, the Side Curtain Airbag on
the crash side of the vehicle is triggered in moderate to
severe side collisions. However, even in collisions where
the airbags deploy, you need the seat belts to keep you in
the correct position for the airbags to protect you properly.
2. Infants in rear-facing child restraints should NEVER
ride in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger front
airbag. An airbag deployment could cause severe injury
or death to infants in that position.
3. Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle
seat belt properly (refer to information on Child Restraint
in this section) should be secured in the rear seat in child
restraints or belt-positioning booster seats.
4. Older children who do not use child restraints or
belt-positioning booster seats should ride properly buckled up in the rear seat. Never allow children to slide the
shoulder belt behind them or under their arm.
5. If a child from 1 to 12 years old must ride in the front
passenger seat because the vehicle is crowded, move the
seat as far back as possible, and use the proper child
restraint (refer to information on Child Restraint in this
section).
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize
the risk of harm from a deploying airbag.
6. You should read the instructions provided with your
child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly.
1. Children 12 years old and under should ride buckled
up in the rear seat.
7. All occupants should use their seat belts properly.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
8. The driver and front passenger seats should be moved
back as far as practical to allow the airbags time to inflate.
9. If your vehicle has side curtain airbags do not lean
against the door, airbags will inflate forcefully into the
space between you and the door.
10. If the airbag system in this vehicle needs to be
modified to accommodate a disabled person, contact the
Customer Center. Phone numbers are provided in the ⬙If
You Need Customer Assistance⬙ section in this manual.
41
WARNING!
• Relying on the airbags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The airbags work
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions, the airbags won’t deploy at all.
Always wear your seat belts even though you
have airbags.
• Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument panel during airbag deployment could cause
serious injury. Airbags need room to inflate. Sit
back, comfortably extending your arms to reach
the steering wheel or instrument panel.
• If the vehicle has side curtain airbags, they also
need room to inflate. Do not lean against the door
or window. Sit upright in the center of the seat.
Air Bag System Components
The airbag system consists of the following:
• Airbag Control Module (ACM)
• Side Remote Acceleration Sensors (if equipped)
2
42
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• Airbag Warning Light
• Driver Airbag
• Front Passenger Airbag
• Supplemental Side Curtain Airbags above Side Windows (if equipped)
• Steering Wheel and Column
• Instrument Panel
• Interconnecting Wiring
• Seatbelt Reminder Light
• Knee Impact Bolsters
• Front Acceleration Sensors
• Driver and Front Passenger Seat Belt Pretensioners
How The Airbag System Works
• The Airbag Control Module (ACM) determines if a
frontal collision is severe enough to require the airbags
to inflate. The front airbag inflators are designed to
provide different rates of airbag inflation from direction provided by the ACM. The ACM will not detect
roll over.
• The ACM also monitors the readiness of the electronic
parts of the system whenever the ignition switch is in
the START or ON positions. These include all of the
items listed above except the knee bolster, the instrument panel, and the steering wheel and column. If the
key is in the LOCK position, in the ACC position, or
not in the ignition, the airbags are not on and will not
inflate.
• The ACM also turns on the Airbag Warning
Light in the instrument panel for 6 to 8
seconds as a self-check when the ignition is
first turned on. After the self-check, the
Airbag Warning Light will turn off. If the ACM detects
a malfunction in any part of the system, it turns on the
Airbag Warning Light either momentarily or continuously. A single chime will sound if the light comes on
again after initial start up.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Ignoring the AIRBAG Warning Light in your instrument panel could mean you won’t have the airbags
to protect you in a collision. If the light does not
come on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it
comes on as you drive, have the airbag system
checked right away.
• The Driver and Front Passenger Airbag/Inflator
Units are located in the center of the steering wheel
and the passenger side of the instrument panel. When
the ACM detects a collision requiring the airbags, it
signals the inflator units. A large quantity of nontoxic
gas is generated to inflate the front airbags. Different
airbag inflation rates may be possible based on collision severity. The steering wheel hub trim cover, and
the upper passenger side of the instrument panel
separate and fold out of the way, as the bags inflate to
their full size. The bags fully inflate in about 50 - 70
milliseconds. This is about half of the time that it takes
to blink your eyes. The bags then quickly deflate while
helping to restrain the driver and front passenger. The
43
driver’s front airbag gas is vented through vent holes
in the sides of the airbag. The passenger’s front airbag
gas is vented through vent holes in the sides of the
airbag. In this way, the airbags do not interfere with
your control of the vehicle.
• The Side Impact SRS Side Curtain Airbag are designed to activate only in certain side collisions. When
the ACM (with side impact option) detects a collision
requiring the side curtain airbag to inflate, it signals
the inflators on the crash side of the vehicle. A quantity
of nontoxic gas is generated to inflate the side curtain
airbag. The inflating side curtain airbag pushes the
outside edge of the headliner out of the way and
covers the window. The airbag inflates in about 30
milliseconds (about one quarter of the time that it
takes to blink your eyes) with enough force to injure
you if you are not belted and seated properly, or if
items are positioned in the area where the side curtain
airbag inflates. This especially applies to children. The
side curtain airbag is only about 3-1/2 inches (9 cm)
thick when it is inflated.
2
44
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of
the driver and the front passenger, and position everyone for the best interaction with the front airbag.
However, if you haven’t healed significantly within a
few days, or if you have any blistering, see your doctor
immediately.
If A Deployment Occurs
The airbag system is designed to deploy when the ACM
detects a moderate-to-severe collision, to help restrain the
driver and front passenger, and then to immediately
deflate.
• As the airbags deflate, you may see some smoke-like
particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the
process that generates the nontoxic gas used for airbag
inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the skin,
eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye irritation,
rinse the area with cool water. For nose or throat
irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation continues,
see your doctor. If these particles settle on your
clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s instructions for cleaning.
NOTE: A frontal collision that is not severe enough to
need airbag protection will not activate the system. This
does not mean something is wrong with the airbag
system.
If you do have a collision, which deploys the airbags, any
or all of the following may occur:
• The nylon airbag material may sometimes cause abrasions and/or skin reddening to the driver and front
passenger as the airbags deploy and unfold. The
abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those
you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium
floor. They are not caused by contact with chemicals.
They are not permanent and normally heal quickly.
• It is not advisable to drive your vehicle after the
airbags have been deployed. If you are involved in
another collision, the airbags will not be in place to
protect you.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Deployed airbags can’t protect you in another collision. Have the airbags replaced by an authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
Enhanced Accident Response Feature
If the airbags deploy after an impact and the electrical
system remains functional, vehicles equipped with
power door locks will unlock automatically. In addition,
approximately 5 seconds after the vehicle has stopped
moving, the interior lights will illuminate to aid visibility.
NOTE: The interior lights can only be deactivated if the
key is removed from the ignition switch or the vehicle is
driven.
45
Maintaining Your Airbag System
WARNING!
• Modifications to any part of the airbag system
could cause it to fail when you need it. You could
be injured because the airbags are not there to
protect you. Do not modify the components or
wiring, including adding any kind of badges or
stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or
the upper passenger side of the instrument panel.
Do not modify the front bumper, vehicle body
structure, or frame.
• You need proper knee impact protection in a
collision. Do not mount or locate any aftermarket
equipment on or behind the knee impact bolster.
• It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the
airbag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who
works on your vehicle that it has airbags.
2
46
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Airbag Warning Light
You will want to have the airbags ready to
inflate for your protection in an impact. While
the airbag system is designed to be maintenance free, if any of the following occurs, have
an authorized dealer service the system promptly:
• The Airbag Warning Light does not come on or flickers
during the 6 to 8 seconds when the ignition switch is
first turned on.
• The light remains on or flickers after the 6 to 8 second
interval.
• The light flickers or comes on and remains on while
driving.
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
In the event of an airbag deployment, your vehicle is
designed to record up to 2-seconds of specific vehicle
data parameters (see list below) in an event data recorder
prior to the moment of airbag deployment. Please note
that such data are ONLY recorded if an airbag deploys,
and are otherwise unavailable. In conjunction with other
data gathered during a complete accident investigation,
the electronic data may be used by DaimlerChrysler and
others to learn more about the possible causes of crashes
and associated injuries in order to assess and improve
vehicle performance. In addition to crash investigations
initiated by DaimlerChrysler, such investigations may be
requested by customers, insurance carriers, government
officials, and professional crash researchers, such as those
associated with universities, and with hospital and insurance organizations.
In the event that an investigation is undertaken by
DaimlerChrysler (regardless of initiative), the company
or its designated representative will first obtain permission of the appropriate custodial entity for the vehicle
(usually the vehicle owner or lessee) before accessing the
electronic data stored, unless ordered to download data
by a court with legal jurisdiction (i.e., pursuant to a
warrant). A copy of the data will be provided to the
custodial entity upon request. General data that does not
identify particular vehicles or crashes may be released for
incorporation in aggregate crash databases, such as those
maintained by the US government and various states.
Data of a potentially sensitive nature, such as would
identify a particular driver, vehicle, or crash, will be
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
treated confidentially. Confidential data will not be disclosed by DaimlerChrysler to any third party except
when:
1. Used for research purposes, such as to match data
with a particular crash record in an aggregate database,
provided confidentiality of personal data is thereafter
preserved
2. Used in defense of
DaimlerChrysler product
litigation
involving
a
3. Requested by police under a legal warrant
4. Otherwise required by law
Data Parameters that May Be Recorded:
• Diagnostic trouble code(s) and warning light status for
electronically controlled safety systems, including the
airbag system
• ⬙Time⬙ of airbag deployment (in terms of ignition
cycles and vehicle mileage)
• Airbag deployment level (if applicable)
• Seatbelt status
47
• Brake status (service and parking brakes)
• Accelerator status (including vehicle speed)
• Engine control status (including engine speed)
• Cruise control status (if applicable)
• Traction/stability control status (if applicable)
Child Restraint
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up all the
time — babies and children, too. Every state in the United
States and all Canadian provinces require that small
children ride in proper restraint systems. This is the law,
and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
Children 12 years and under should ride properly buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash
statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in
the rear seats rather than in the front.
2
48
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child, even a tiny
baby, can become a missile inside the vehicle. The
force required to hold even an infant on your lap
could become so great that you could not hold the
child, no matter how strong you are. The child and
others could be badly injured. Any child riding in
your vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the
child’s size.
There are different sizes and types of restraints for
children from newborn size to the child almost large
enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child
seat Owner’s Manual to ensure you have the correct seat
for your child. Use the restraint that is correct for your
child:
Infants and Child Restraints
• Safety experts recommend that children ride
rearward-facing in the vehicle until they are at least
one year old and weigh at least 20 lbs (9 kg). Two types
of child restraints can be used rearward-facing: infant
carriers and “convertible” child seats.
• The infant carrier is only used rearward-facing in the
vehicle. It is recommended for children who weigh up
to about 20 lbs (9 kg). “Convertible” child seats can be
used either rearward-facing or forward-facing in the
vehicle. Convertible child seats often have a higher
weight limit in the rearward-facing direction than
infant carriers do, so they can be used rearward-facing
by children who weigh more than 20 lbs (9 kg) but are
less than one year old. Both types of child restraints are
held in the vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt or the
LATCH child restraint anchorage system. Refer to
“LATCH — Child Seat Anchorage System (Lower
Anchors and Tether for CHildren)” in this section.
• Rearward-facing child seats must NEVER be used in
the front seat of a vehicle with the front passenger
airbag unless the airbag is turned off. An airbag
deployment could cause severe injury or death to
infants in this position.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
49
Older Children and Child Restraints
Children who weigh more than 20 lbs (9 kg) and who are
older than one year can ride forward-facing in the
vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and convertible child
seats used in the forward-facing direction are for children
who weigh 20 to 40 lbs (9 to 18 kg) and who are older
than one year. These child seats are also held in the
vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt or the LATCH child
restraint anchorage system. Refer to “LATCH — Child
Seat Anchorage System (Lower Anchors and Tether for
CHildren)” in this section.
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt
comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend
over the front of the seat when their back is against the
seat back, should use the lap/shoulder belt in a rear seat.
The belt-positioning booster seat is for children weighing
more than 40 lbs (18 kg), but who are still too small to fit
the vehicle’s seat belts properly. If the child cannot sit
with knees bent over the vehicle’s seat cushion while the
child’s back is against the seat back, they should use a
belt-positioning booster seat. The child and beltpositioning booster seat are held in the vehicle by the
lap/shoulder belt.
• If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck, move the
child closer to the center of the vehicle. Never allow a
child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind
their back.
• Make sure that the child is upright in the seat.
• The lap portion should be low on the hips and as snug
as possible.
• Check belt fit periodically. A child’s squirming or
slouching can move the belt out of position.
NOTE:
For additional information, refer
www.seatcheck.org or call 1–866–SEATCHECK.
to
2
50
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Improper installation can lead to failure of an
infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a
collision. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
• A rearward facing child restraint should only be
used in a rear seat. A rearward facing child restraint in the front seat may be struck by a
deploying passenger airbag, which may cause
severe or fatal injury to the infant.
Here are some tips on getting the most out of your child
restraint:
• Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it
has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety
Standards. We also recommend that you make sure
that you can install the child restraint in the vehicle
where you will use it before you buy it.
• The restraint must be appropriate for your child’s
weight and height. Check the label on the restraint for
weight and height limits.
• Carefully follow the instructions that come with the
restraint. If you install the restraint improperly, it may
not work when you need it.
• Buckle the child into the seat according to the child
restraint manufacturer’s directions.
• When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in the
vehicle with the seat belt or remove it from the vehicle.
Do not leave it loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or
collision, it could strike the occupants or seat backs
and cause serious personal injury.
LATCH — Child Seat Anchorage System (Lower
Anchors and Tether for CH ildren)
Your vehicle’s rear seat is equipped with the child
restraint anchorage system called LATCH. The LATCH
system provides for the installation of the child restraint
without using the vehicle’s seat belts, instead securing
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
the child restraint using lower anchorages and upper
tether straps from the child restraint to the vehicle
structure.
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems are now available. However, because the lower anchorages are to be
introduced over a period of years, child restraint systems
having attachments for those anchorages will continue to
have features for installation using the vehicle’s seat
belts. Child restraints having tether straps and hooks for
connection to the top tether anchorages have been available for some time. For some older child restraints, many
child restraint manufacturers offer add-on tether strap
kits or retrofit kits. You are urged to take advantage of all
the available attachments provided with your child restraint in any vehicle.
51
All three rear-seating positions have lower anchorages
that are capable of accommodating LATCH-compatible
child seats. You should NEVER install LATCHcompatible child seats such that two seats share a common lower anchorage. If installing child seats in adjacent
rear-seating positions, or if your child restraints are not
LATCH-compatible, install the restraints using the vehicle’s seat belts.
LATCH Anchorages
2
52
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Installing the LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint
System
We urge that you carefully follow the directions of the
manufacturer when installing your child restraint. Not all
child restraint systems will be installed as described here.
Again, carefully follow the installation instructions that
were provided with the child restraint system.
The rear seat lower anchorages are round bars,
located at the rear of the seat cushion where it
meets the seat back, and are just visible when
you lean into the rear seat to install the child
restraint. You will easily feel them if you run your finger
along the intersection of the seatback and seat cushion
surfaces.
In addition, there are tether strap anchorages
behind each rear seating position located in the
panel between the rear seat back and the rear
window. These tether strap anchorages are
under a plastic cover with this symbol on it.
Many, but not all restraint systems will be equipped with
separate straps on each side, with each having a hook or
connector for attachment to the lower anchorage and a
means of adjusting the tension in the strap. Forwardfacing toddler restraints and some rear-facing infant
restraints will also be equipped with a tether strap, a
hook for attachment to the tether strap anchorage and a
means of adjusting the tension of the strap.
You will first loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and
on the tether strap so that you can more easily attach the
hooks or connectors to the vehicle anchorages. Next,
attach the lower hooks or connectors over the top of the
seat cover material. Then rotate the tether anchorage
cover directly behind the seat where you are placing the
child restraint and attach the tether strap to the anchorage, being careful to route the tether strap to provide the
most direct path between the anchor and the child
restraint. Finally, tighten all three straps as you push the
child restraint rearward and downward into the seat,
removing slack in the straps according to the child
restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
NOTE:
• Ensure that the tether strap does not slip into the
opening between the seat backs as you remove slack in
the strap.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• When using the LATCH attaching system to install a
child restraint, please ensure that all seat belts not
being used for occupant restraints are stowed and out
of reach of children. It is recommended that before
installing the child restraint, buckle the seat belt so the
seat belt is tucked behind the child restraint and out of
reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child
restraint installation, instead of tucking the seat belt
behind the child restraint, route the seat belt through
the child restraint belt path and then buckle it. This
should stow the seat belt out of the reach of an
inquisitive child. Remind all children in the vehicle
that the seat belts are not toys and should not be
played with, and never leave your child unattended in
the vehicle.
53
WARNING!
Improper installation of a child restraint to the
LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of an infant or
child restraint. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions exactly
when installing an infant or child restraint.
Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat
belt
The passenger seat belts are equipped with either cinching latch plates or automatic locking retractors, which are
designed to keep the lap portion tight around the child
restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking clip.
Pulling up on the shoulder portion of the lap/shoulder
belt will tighten the belt. The cinching latch plate will
keep the belt tight, however, any seat belt system will
loosen with time, so check the belt occasionally, and pull
it tight if necessary.
Seat belts with an automatic locking retractor have a
distinctive label on the seat belt webbing. The seat belt
must be in the automatic locking mode in order to enable
2
54
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
a child restraint to be tightly installed. Refer to “Automatic Locking Mode” in this section for details. A locking
clip should not be necessary once the automatic locking
feature is enabled. Position the shoulder and lap belt on
the child restraint. The automatic locking retractor is
activated by first attaching the child seat, then pulling all
of the webbing out of the retractor, then allowing back in.
Tighten webbing. To release, simply unbuckle the seat
belt by depressing the button, allowing the webbing to
retract into the retractor.
plate into the buckle again. If you still can’t make the
child restraint secure, try a different seating position.
To attach a child restraint tether strap:
1. Rotate the cover over the anchor directly behind the
seat where you are placing the child restraint.
In the rear seat, you may have trouble tightening the
lap/shoulder belt on the child restraint because the
buckle or latch plate is too close to the belt path opening
on the restraint. Disconnect the latch plate from the
buckle and twist the short buckle-end belt several times
to shorten it. Insert the latch plate into the buckle with the
release button facing out.
If the belt still can’t be tightened, or if by pulling and
pushing on the restraint loosens the belt, you may need
to do something more. Disconnect the latch plate from
the buckle, turn the buckle around, and insert the latch
Tether Strap Mounting
2. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path
for the strap between the anchor and the child seat.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
3. Attach the tether strap hook (A) of the child restraint to
the anchor (B) and remove slack in the tether strap
according to the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
NOTE: Ensure that the tether strap does not slip into
the opening between the seat backs as you remove slack
in the strap.
WARNING!
An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to
increased head motion and possible injury to the
child. Use only the anchor positions directly behind
the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether
strap.
Transporting Pets
Airbags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet.
An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly
injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in
a collision.
55
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses
or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.
BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
A long break-in period is not required for the drivetrain
(engine, transmission, and rear axle) in your new vehicle.
Drive moderately during the first 500 miles (800 km).
After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or 55
mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable.
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration, within the
limits of local traffic laws, contributes to a good break-in.
However, wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can
be detrimental and should be avoided.
The engine oil, transmission fluid, and axle lubricant
installed at the factory is high quality and energy conserving. Oil, fluid, and lubricant changes should be
consistent with anticipated climate and conditions under
which vehicle operations will occur. The recommended
viscosity and quality grades is shown in Section 7 of this
manual.
2
56
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
WARNING!
Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral
Oil in the engine or damage may result.
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
NOTE: A new engine may consume some oil during its
first few thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This
should be considered as a normal part of the break-in and
not interpreted as an indication of difficulty.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
SAFETY TIPS
Transporting Passengers
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO
AREA.
Lock Your Vehicle
Always remove the keys from the ignition and lock all
doors when leaving the vehicle unattended, even in your
own driveway or garage. Try to park your vehicle in a
well-lit area and never invite theft by leaving articles of
value exposed.
Exhaust Gas
Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined
areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in or
out of the area.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the engine
running, adjust your heating or cooling controls to force
outside air into the vehicle. Set the blower at high speed.
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust
system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the
vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is
damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken,
damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open
seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes
to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition,
inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
57
WARNING!
• Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain
carbon monoxide (CO) which is colorless and
odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious
and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO) follow the safety tips below.
• If you are required to drive with the trunk open,
make sure that all windows are closed, and the
climate control blower switch is set at high speed.
DO NOT use the recirculation mode.
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle
Seat Belts
Inspect the belt system periodically, checking for cuts,
frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced
immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system.
2
58
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a
collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after
a collision if they have been damaged (bent retractor, torn
webbing, etc. If there is any question regarding belt or
retractor condition, replace the belt.
Airbag Warning Light
The light should come on and remain on for 6 to 8
seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first
turned ON. If the light is not lit during starting, see you
authorized dealer. If the light stays on, flickers, or comes
on while driving, have the system checked by an authorized dealer.
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place
the blower control on high speed. You should be able to
feel the air directed against the windshield.
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
The Vehicle
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear
patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects
lodged in the tread. Inspect the tread and sidewall for
cuts and cracks. Check the wheel nuts for tightness.
Check the tires (including spare) for proper pressure.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of exterior lights
while you work the controls. Check turn signal and high
beam indicator lights on the instrument panel.
Door Latches
Check for positive closing, latching, and locking.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel,
engine coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline
fumes are detected or if fuel, power steering fluid, or
brake fluid leaks are suspected, the cause should be
located and corrected immediately.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
3
䡵 Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63
▫ Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67
▫ Automatic Dimming Inside Mirror . . . . . . . . . .63
▫ Phone Call Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73
▫ Outside Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63
▫ UConnect™ System Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75
▫ Exterior Mirrors Folding Feature —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64
▫ Advanced Phone Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . .78
▫ Driver’s Side Outside Mirror Auto Dimmer . . . .64
▫ Things You Should Know About Your
UConnect™ System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80
▫ Tilt In Reverse Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64
䡵 Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85
▫ Power Remote Control Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . .64
▫ Power Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85
▫ Heated Remote Control Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . .65
▫ Power Reclining Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86
▫ Illuminated Vanity Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65
▫ Lumbar Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87
䡵 Hands–Free Communication (UConnect™) —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66
▫ Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87
▫ Heated Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87
60
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89
▫ Lights-On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98
䡵 Driver Memory Seat — If Equipped . . . . . . . . .90
▫ Fog Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98
▫ Programming The Memory Feature . . . . . . . . .90
▫ Multi-Function Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98
▫ Linking & Unlinking The Remote Keyless
Transmitter To The Memory Feature . . . . . . . . .91
▫ Overhead Console Map/Reading Lights . . . . . .99
▫ Memory Position Recall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92
▫ Easy Entry/Exit Seat (Available With Memory
Seat Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92
䡵 To Open And Close The Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . .93
䡵 Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95
▫ Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95
▫ Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95
▫ Headlights On With Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96
▫ Smartbeams — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96
▫ Headlight Time Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97
▫ Daytime Running Lights (Canada Only) . . . . . .98
▫ Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
䡵 Windshield Wipers And Washers . . . . . . . . . . 101
▫ Intermittent Wiper System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
▫ Mist Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
▫ Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
▫ Headlights On With Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
▫ Rain Sensing Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
▫ Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
䡵 Headlight Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
▫ Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
䡵 Power Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column . . . . . 107
䡵 Adjustable Pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
61
䡵 Electronic Speed Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
▫ Erasing HomeLink Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
▫ Electronic Speed Control Operation . . . . . . . . 109
▫ Reprogramming a Single HomeLink Button . . . 120
▫ To Activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
▫ Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
▫ To Set At A Desired Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
䡵 Power Sunroof — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
▫ To Deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
▫ Opening Sunroof - Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
▫ To Resume Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
▫ Closing Sunroof - Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
▫ To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
▫ Pinch Protect Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
▫ To Accelerate For Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
▫ Pinch Protect Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
䡵 Rear Park Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
▫ Venting Sunroof - Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
䡵 Overhead Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
▫ Sunshade Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
▫ Courtesy/Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
▫ Sunglasses Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
▫ Sunroof Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
䡵 Garage Door Opener (HomeLink威) . . . . . . . . . 116
▫ Ignition Off Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
▫ Programming HomeLink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
▫ Sunroof Fully Closed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
▫ Canadian Programming/Gate Programming . . 119
䡵 Electrical Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
▫ Using HomeLink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
▫ Electrical Outlet Use With Engine Off . . . . . . . 125
3
62
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
䡵 Cup Holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
䡵 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
▫ Front Seat Cup Holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
▫ Console Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
▫ Rear Seat Cup Holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
▫ Cargo Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
䡵 Load Leveling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
MIRRORS
63
CAUTION!
Automatic Dimming Inside Mirror
This mirror automatically adjusts for annoying headlight
glare from vehicles behind you. You can turn the feature
on or off by pressing the button at the base of the mirror.
A light in the button will indicate when the dimming
feature is activated.
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning,
never spray any cleaning solution directly onto the
mirror. Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and
wipe the mirror clean.
Outside Mirrors
To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirror(s)
to center on the adjacent lane of traffic and a slight
overlap of the view obtained from the inside mirror.
NOTE: The passenger side convex outside mirror will
give a much wider view to the rear, and especially of the
lane next to your vehicle.
Automatic Dimming Mirror
3
64
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side
convex mirror will look smaller and farther away
than they really are. Relying too much on your
passenger side convex mirror could cause you to
collide with another vehicle or other object. Use your
inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a
vehicle seen in the passenger side convex mirror.
Exterior Mirrors Folding Feature — If Equipped
Some models have exterior mirrors that are hinged. The
hinge allows the mirror to pivot forward and rearward to
resist damage. The hinge has three detent positions, full
forward, full rearward, and normal.
Driver’s Side Outside Mirror Auto Dimmer
This mirror automatically adjusts for annoying headlight
glare from vehicles behind you. You can turn this feature
on or off by pressing the button at the base of the Inside
Rearview Mirror.
Tilt in Reverse Feature
The ⬙Tilt in Reverse⬙ feature tilts the outside rearview
mirrors downward when the ignition switch is in the ON
position and the transmission is in the R (Reverse)
position. This feature provides the driver with a better
view of the ground and vehicle in the area of the rear tires
when backing up. The mirrors will move back to their
previous position when the transmission is shifted out of
R (Reverse).
The ⬙Tilt in Reverse⬙ feature can be enabled or disabled.
For details, refer to “Tilt Mirrors Down in Reverse,”
under “Personal Settings (Customer Programmable Features),” under “Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC)” in Section 4 of this manual.
Power Remote Control Mirrors
The power mirror switch is located on the driver’s door
trim panel next to the power door lock switch. A rotary
knob selects the left mirror, right mirror, or off position.
After selecting a mirror, move the knob in the same
direction you want the mirror to move. Use the center off
position to guard against accidentally moving a mirror
position.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
65
Illuminated Vanity Mirrors
An illuminated vanity mirror is on the sun visor. To use
the mirror, rotate the sun visor downward and swing the
mirror cover upward. The light turns on automatically.
Closing the mirror cover turns off the lights.
Power Mirror Control
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Driver Memory
Seat, you can use your remote keyless entry transmitter
or the memory switch on the driver’s door panel to
return the power mirrors to pre-programmed positions.
Refer to “Driver Memory Seat” in this section for details.
Heated Remote Control Mirrors
These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This feature
is activated whenever you turn on the Rear Window
Defrost.
Illuminated Vanity Mirror
3
66
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
HANDS–FREE COMMUNICATION (UConnect™) —
IF EQUIPPED
UConnect™ is a voice-activated, hands-free, in- vehicle
communications system. UConnect™ allows you to dial
a phone number with your cellular phone using simple
voice commands (e.g., ⬙Call” ѧ “Mike” ѧ”Work⬙ or ⬙Dial”
ѧ “248-555-1212⬙). Your cellular phone’s audio is transmitted through your vehicle’s audio system; the system
will automatically mute your radio when using the
UConnect™ system.
NOTE: The UConnect™ system use requires a cellular
phone equipped with the Bluetooth ⬙Hands-Free Profile,⬙
version 0.96 or higher. See www.chrysler.com/uconnect
for supported phones.
UConnect™ allows you to transfer calls between the
system and your cellular phone as you enter or exit your
vehicle, and enables you to mute the system’s microphone for private conversation.
The UConnect™ phonebook enables you to store up to 32
names and four numbers per name. Each language has a
separate 32-name phonebook accessible only in that
language. This system is driven through your Bluetooth™ Hands-Free profile cellular phone. UConnect™
features Bluetooth™ technology - the global standard
that enables different electronic devices to connect to
each other without wires or a docking station, so UConnect works no matter where you stow your cellular
phone (be it your purse, pocket, or briefcase), as long as
your phone is turned on and has been paired to the
vehicle’s UConnect™ system. The UConnect™ system
allows up to seven cellular phones to be linked to system.
Only one linked (or paired) cellular phone can be used
with the system at a time. The system is available in
English, Spanish, or French languages (as equipped).
The rearview mirror contains the microphone for the
system and the control buttons that will enable you to
access the system.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
67
system can be adjusted either from the radio volume
control knob, or from the steering wheel radio control
(right switch), if so equipped.
The radio display will be used for visual prompts from
the UConnect™ system such as ⬙CELL⬙ or caller ID on
certain radios.
UConnect™ Switches
The UConnect™ system can be used with any HandsFree Profile certified Bluetooth™ cellular phone. See
www.chrysler.com/uconnect for supported phones. If
your cellular phone supports a different profile (e.g.,
Headset Profile), you may not be able to use any UConnect™ features. Refer to your cellular service provider or
the phone manufacturer for details.
The UConnect™ system is fully integrated with the
vehicle’s audio system. The volume of the UConnect™
Operations
Voice commands can be used to operate the UConnect™
system and to navigate through the UConnect™ menu
structure. Voice commands are required after most
UConnect™ system prompts. You will be prompted for a
specific command and then guided through the available
options.
• Prior to giving a voice command, one must wait for
the voice on beep, which follows the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt
or another prompt.
• For certain operations, compound commands can be
used. For example, instead of saying ⬙Setup⬙ and then
⬙Phone Pairing,⬙ the following compound command
can be said: ⬙Setup Phone Pairing.⬙
3
68
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• For each feature explanation in this section, only the
combined form of the voice command is given. You
can also break the commands into parts and say each
part of the command, when you are asked for it. For
example, you can use the combined form voice command ⬙Phonebook New Entry,⬙ or you can break the
combined form command into two voice commands:
⬙Phonebook⬙ and ⬙New Entry.⬙ Please remember, the
UConnect™ system works best when you talk in a
normal conversational tone, as if speaking to some one
sitting eight feet away from you.
Voice Command Tree
Refer to “Voice Tree” at the end of this section.
Help Command
If you need assistance at any prompt, or if you want to
know your options are at any prompt, say ⬙Help⬙ following the voice on beep. The UConnect™ system will play
all the options at any prompt if you ask for help.
To activate the UConnect™ system from idle, simply
press the ’Phone’ button and follow audible prompts for
directions. All UConnect™ system sessions begin with a
press of the ’Phone’ button on the mirror.
Cancel Command
At any prompt, after the voice on beep, you can say
⬙Cancel⬙ and you will be returned to the main menu.
However, in a few instances the system will take you
back to the previous menu.
Pair (Link) UConnect™ System to a Cellular Phone
To begin using your UConnect™ system, you must pair
your compatible Bluetooth™ enabled cellular phone.
NOTE: The UConnect™ system use requires a cellular
phone equipped with the Bluetooth ⬙Hands-Free Profile,⬙
version 0.96 or higher. See www.chrysler.com/uconnect
for supported phones.
To complete the pairing process, you will need to reference your cellular phone owner’s manual. One of the
following vehicle specific websites may also provide
detailed instructions for pairing with the brand of phone
that you have:
NOTE:
• www.chrysler.com/uconnect
• www.dodge.com/uconnect
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• www.jeep.com/uconnect
The following are general phone to UConnect™ System
pairing instructions:
• Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Setup Phone Pairing⬙ and follow the audible prompts.
• When prompted, after the voice on beep, say ⬙Pair a
Phone⬙ and follow the audible prompts.
• You will be asked to say a four-digit pin number,
which you will later need to enter into your cellular.
You can enter any four-digit pin number. You will not
need to remember this pin number after the initial
pairing process.
• For identification purposes, you will be prompted to
give the UConnect™ system a name for your cellular
phone. Each cellular phone that is paired should be
given a unique phone name.
• You will then be asked to give your cellular phone a
priority level between 1 and 7, 1 being the highest
priority. You can pair up to seven cellular phones to
69
your UConnect™ system. However, at any given time,
only one cellular phone can be in use, connected to
your UConnect™ System. The priority allows the
UConnect™ system to know which cellular phone to
use if multiple cellular phones are in the vehicle at the
same time. For example, if priority 3 and priority 5
phones are present in the vehicle, the UConnect™
system will use the priority 3 cellular phone when you
make a call. You can select to use a lower priority
cellular phone at any time (refer to ⬙Advanced Phone
Connectivity⬙).
Call/Dial by Saying a Number
• Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Dial.⬙
• System will prompt you to say the number you want
call.
• For example, you can say ⬙234-567-8901.⬙
3
70
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• The UConnect™ system will confirm the phone number and then dial. The number will appear in the
display of certain radios.
Call/Dial by Saying a Name
• Press the “Phone” button to begin.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
“Dial” or Call.⬙
• System will prompt you to say the name of the person
you want call.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
the name of the person you want to call. For example,
you can say ⬙John Doe,⬙ where John Doe is a previously stored name entry in the UConnect™ phonebook. Refer to ⬙Add Names to Your UConnect™
Phonebook,⬙ to learn how to store a name in the
phonebook.
• The UConnect™ system will confirm the name and
then dial the corresponding phone number, which
may appear in the display of certain radios.
Add Names to Your UConnect™ Phonebook
NOTE: Adding names to phonebook is recommended
when vehicle is not in motion.
• Press the “Phone” button to begin.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Phonebook New Entry.⬙
• When prompted, say the name of the new entry. Use of
long names helps the voice recognition and is recommended. For example, say ⬙Robert Smith⬙ or ⬙Robert⬙
instead of ⬙Bob.⬙
• When prompted, enter the number designation (e.g.,
⬙Home,⬙ ⬙Work,⬙ ⬙Mobile,⬙ or ⬙Pager⬙). This will allow
you to store multiple numbers for each phonebook
entry, if desired.
• When prompted, recite the phone number for the
phonebook entry that you are adding.
After you are finished adding an entry into the phonebook, you will be given the opportunity to add more
phone numbers to the current entry or to return to the
main menu.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The UConnect™ system will allow you to enter up to 32
names in the phonebook with each name having up to
four associated phone numbers and designations. Each
language has a separate 32-name phonebook accessible
only in that language.
Edit Entries in the UConnect™ Phonebook
NOTE: Editing phonebook entries is recommended
when vehicle is not in motion.
• Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Phonebook Edit.⬙
• You will then be asked for the name of the phonebook
entry that you wish to edit.
• Next, choose the number designation (home, work,
mobile, or pager) that you wish to edit.
• When prompted, recite the new phone number for the
phonebook entry that you are editing.
71
After you are finished editing an entry in the phonebook,
you will be given the opportunities to edit another entry
in the phonebook, call the number you just edited, or
return to the main menu.
⬙Phonebook Edit⬙ can be used to add another phone
number to a name entry that already exists in the
phonebook. For example, the entry John Doe may have a
mobile and a home number, but you can add John Doe’s
work number later using the ⬙Phonebook Edit⬙ feature.
Delete Entries in the UConnect™ Phonebook
NOTE: Editing phonebook entries is recommended
when vehicle is not in motion.
• Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Phonebook Delete.⬙
• After you enter the Phonebook Delete menu, you will
then be asked for the name of the entry that you wish
to delete. You can either say the name of a phonebook
entry that you wish to delete or you can say ⬙List
Names⬙ to hear a list of the entries in the phonebook
3
72
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
from which you choose. To select one of the entries
from the list, press the ⬙Voice Recognition⬙ button
while the UConnect™ system is playing the desired
entry and say ⬙Delete.⬙
• After you enter the name, the UConnect™ system will
ask you which designation you wish to delete, home,
work, mobile, or pager. Say the designation you wish
to delete.
• Note that only the phonebook entry in the current
language is deleted.
After confirmation, the phonebook entries will be deleted. Note that only the phonebook in the current
language is deleted.
Delete All Entries in the UConnect™ Phonebook
• Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Phonebook Erase All.⬙
• The UConnect™ system will ask you to verify that you
wish to delete all the entries from the phonebook.
• After confirmation, the phonebook entries will be
deleted.
List All Names in the UConnect™ Phonebook
• Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Phonebook List Names.⬙
• The UConnect™ system will play the names of all the
phonebook entries.
• To call one of the names in the list, press the ⬙Voice
Recognition’ button during the playing of the desired
name, and then say ⬙Call.⬙ NOTE: the user can also
exercise ⬙Edit⬙ or ⬙Delete⬙ operations at this point.
• The UConnect™ system will then prompt you as to
number designation you wish to call.
• The selected number will be dialed.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Phone Call Features
The following features can be accessed through the
UConnect™ system if the feature(s) are available on your
cellular service plan. For example, if your cellular service
plan provides three-way calling, this feature can be
accessed through the UConnect™ system. Check with
your cellular service provider for the features that you
have.
Answer or Reject an Incoming Call - No Call
Currently in Progress
When you receive a call on your cellular phone, the
UConnect™ system will interrupt the vehicle audio
system, if on, and will ask if you would like to answer the
call. To reject the call, press and hold the ’Phone’ button
until you hear a single beep indicating that the incoming
call was rejected.
Answer or Reject an Incoming Call - Call
Currently in Progress
If a call is currently in progress and you have another
incoming call, you will hear the same network tones for
call waiting that you normally hear when using your cell
phone. Press the ’Phone’ button to place the current call
73
on hold and answer the incoming call. NOTE: The
UConnect™ system compatible phones in market today
do not support rejecting an incoming call when another
call is in progress. Therefore, the user can only either
answer an incoming call or ignore it.
Making a Second Call while Current Call in
Progress
To make a second call while you are currently in a call,
press the ’Voice Recognition’ button and say ⬙Dial⬙ or
⬙Call⬙ followed by the phone number or phonebook entry
you wish to call. The first call will be on hold while the
second call is in progress. To go back to the first call, refer
to ⬙Toggling Between Calls.⬙ To combine two calls, refer
to ⬙Conference Call.⬙
Place/Retrieve a Call from Hold
To put a call on hold, press the ⬘Phone’ button until you
hear a single beep. This indicates that the call is on hold.
To bring the call back from hold, press and hold the
⬘Phone’ button until you hear a single beep.
3
74
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Toggling Between Calls
If two calls are in progress (one active and one on hold),
press the ’Phone’ button until you hear a single beep
indicating that the active and hold status of the two calls
have switched. Only one call can be placed on hold at one
time.
Conference Call
When two calls are in progress (one active and one on
hold), press and hold the ’Phone’ button until you hear a
double beep indicating that the two calls have been
joined into one conference call.
Three-Way Calling
To initiate three-way calling, press the ’Voice Recognition’ button while a call is in progress and make a second
phone call as described under ⬙Making a Second Call
while Current Call in Progress.⬙ After the second call has
established, press and hold the ’Phone’ button until you
hear a double beep indicating that the two calls have
been joined into one conference call.
Call Termination
To end a call in progress, momentarily press the ⬘Phone’
button. Only the active call(s) will be terminated and if
there is a call on hold, it will become the new active call.
Redial
• Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Redial.⬙
• The UConnect™ system will call the last number that
was dialed on your cellular phone. Note: this may not
be the last number dialed from the UConnect™ system.
Call Continuation
Call continuation is progression of a phone call on
UConnect™ system after the vehicle ignition key has
been switched to off. Call continuation functionality
available on the vehicle can be any one of three types:
• After ignition key is switched off, a call can continue
on the UConnect™ system either until the call ends or
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
until the vehicle battery condition dictates cessation of
the call on the UConnect™ system and transfer of the
call to the mobile phone.
• After ignition key is switched to off, a call can continue
on the UConnect™ system for certain duration, after
which the call is automatically transferred from the
UConnect™ system to the mobile phone.
• An active call is automatically transferred to the
mobile phone after ignition key is switched to off.
UConnect™ System Features
Language Selection
To change the language that the UConnect™ system is
using,
• Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
the name of the language you wish to switch to
(English, Espanol, or Francais, if so equipped).
• Continue to follow the system prompts to complete
language selection.
75
After selecting one of the languages, all prompts and
voice commands will be in that language.
NOTE: After every UConnect™ language change operation, only the language specific 32-name phonebook is
usable. The paired phone name is not language specific
and usable across all languages.
Emergency Assistance
If you are in an emergency and the mobile phone is
reachable:
• Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency
number for your area.
If the phone is not reachable and the UConnect™ system
is operational, you may reach the emergency number as
follows:
• Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Emergency⬙ and the UConnect™ system will instruct
the paired cellular phone to call the emergency number. This feature is only supported in the USA.
3
76
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The emergency number dialed is based on the
Country where the vehicle is purchased (911 for USA and
Canada and 060 for Mexico). The number dialed may not
be applicable with the available cellular service and area.
The UConnect™ system does slightly lower your
chances of successfully making a phone call as to that
for the cell phone directly.
Your phone must be turned on and paired to the
UConnect™ system to allow use of this vehicle feature
in emergency situations when the cell phone has
network coverage and stays paired to the UConnect™
system.
Towing Assistance
If you need towing assistance,
• Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Towing Assistance.⬙
NOTE: The Towing Assistance number dialed is based
on the Country where the vehicle is purchased (1-800528-2069 for USA, 1-877-213-4525 for Canada, 55-14-3454
for Mexico city and 1-800-712-3040 for outside Mexico
city in Mexico).
Please refer to the 24-Hour “Towing Assistance” coverage details in the Warranty information booklet and on
the 24–Hour Towing Assistance Card.
Paging
To learn how to page, refer to ⬙Working with Automated
Systems.⬙ Paging works properly except for pagers of
certain companies which time-out a little too soon to
work properly with the UConnect™ system.
Voice Mail Calling
To learn how to access your voice mail, refer to ⬙Working
with Automated Systems.⬙
Working with Automated Systems
This method is designed to be used in instances where
one generally has to press numbers on the cellular phone
keypad while navigating through an automated telephone system.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
You can use your UConnect™ system to access a voicemail system or an automated service, such as, paging
service or automated customer service. Some services
require immediate response selection, in some instances,
that may be too quick for use of UConnect™ system.
When calling a number with your UConnect™ system
that normally requires you to enter in a touch-tone
sequence on your cellular phone keypad, you can push
the ’Voice Recognition’ button and say the sequence you
wish to enter followed by the word ⬙Send.⬙ For example,
if required to enter your pin number followed with a
pound 3 7 4 6 #, you can press the ’Voice Recognition’
button and say ⬙3 7 4 6 # Send.⬙ Saying a number, or
sequence of numbers, followed by ⬙Send⬙ is also to be
used to navigate through an automated customer service
center menu structure and to leave a number on a pager.
Barge In - Overriding Prompts
The ’Voice Recognition’ button can be used when you
wish to skip part of a prompt and issue your voice
recognition command immediately. For example, if a
prompt is playing ⬙Would you like to pair a phone, clear
77
aѧ,⬙ you could press the ’Voice Recognition’ button and
say ⬙Pair a Phone⬙ to select that option without having to
listen to the rest of the voice prompt.
Turning Confirmation Prompts On/Off
Turning confirmation prompts off will stop the system
from confirming your choices (e.g., the UConnect™
system will not repeat a phone number before you dial
it).
• Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Setup Confirmations.⬙ The UConnect™ system will
play the current confirmation prompt status and you
will be given the choice to change it.
Phone and Network Status Indicators
If available on the radio and/or on a premium display
such as the instrument panel cluster, and supported by
your cell phone, the UConnect™ system will provide
notification to inform you of your phone and network
status when you are attempting to make a phone call
using UConnect™. The status is given for roaming network signal strength, phone battery strength, etc.
3
78
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Dialing Using the Cellular Phone Keypad
You can dial a phone number with your cellular phone
keypad and still use the UConnect™ system (while
dialing via the cell phone keypad, the user must exercise
caution and take precautionary safety measures). By
dialing a number with your paired Bluetooth™ cellular
phone, the audio will be played through your vehicle’s
audio system. The UConnect™ system will work the
same as if you dial the number using voice recognition.
NOTE: Certain brands of mobile phones do not send
the dial ring to the UConnect™ system to play it on the
vehicle audio system, so you will not hear it. Under this
situation, after successfully dialing a number, the user
may feel that the call did not go through even though the
call is in progress. Once your call is answered, you will
hear the audio.
Mute/Un-mute (Mute off)
When you mute the UConnect™ system, you will still be
able to hear the conversation coming from the other
party, but the other party will not be able to hear you. In
order to mute the UConnect™ system:
• Press the ’Voice Recognition’ button.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Mute.⬙
In order to un-mute the UConnect™ system:
• Press the ’Voice Recognition’ button.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Mute-off.⬙
Information Service
When using AT&T Wireless Service, dialing to phone
number ⬙#121,⬙ you can access voice activated automated
system to receive news, weather, stocks, traffic, etc.
related information.
Advanced Phone Connectivity
Transfer Call to and from Cellular Phone
The UConnect™ system allows on going calls to be
transferred from your cellular phone to the UConnect™
system without terminating the call. To transfer an ongoing call from your UConnect™ paired cellular phone to
the UConnect™ system or vice-versa, press the ’Voice
Recognition’ button and say ⬙Transfer Call.⬙
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Connect or Disconnect Link Between the
UConnect™ System and Cellular Phone
Your cellular phone can be paired with many different
electronic devices, but can only be actively ⬙connected⬙
with one electronic device at a time.
If you would like to connect or disconnect the Bluetooth™ connection between a UConnect™ paired cellular
phone and the UConnect™ system, then follow the
instruction described in your cellular phone user’s
manual.
List Paired Cellular Phone Names
• Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Setup Phone pairing”.
• When prompted, say ⬙List Phones.⬙
• The UConnect™ system will play the phone names of
all paired cellular phones in order from the highest to
the lowest priority. To “select” or “delete” a paired
phone being announced, press the ⬘Voice recognition’
79
button and say “Select” or “Delete.” Also, see the next
two sections for an alternate way to “select” or “delete” a paired phone.
Select another Cellular Phone
This feature allows you to select and start using another
phone with the UConnect™ system. The phone must
have been previously paired to the UConnect™ system
that you want to use it with.
• Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Setup Select Phone⬙ and follow the prompts.
• You can also press the ⬘Voice Recognition’ button
anytime while the list is being played, and then choose
the phone that you wish to select.
• The selected phone will be used for the next phone
call. If the selected phone is not available, the UConnect™ system will return to using the highest priority
phone present in or near (approximately with in 30
feet) the vehicle.
3
80
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Delete UConnect™ Paired Cellular Phones
• Performance is maximized under:
• Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
• low-to-medium blower setting,
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Setup Phone Pairing.⬙
• low-to-medium vehicle speed,
• At the next prompt, say ⬙Delete⬙ and follow the
prompts.
• You can also press the ⬘Voice Recognition’ button
anytime while the list is being played and then choose
the phone you wish to delete.
Things You Should Know About Your UConnect™
System
Voice Recognition (VR)
• Always wait for the beep before speaking.
• Speak normally, without pausing, just as you would
speak to a person sitting approximately eight (8) feet
away from you.
• Make sure that no one other than you is speaking
during a voice recognition period.
• low road noise,
• smooth road surface,
• fully closed windows,
• dry weather condition.
• Even though the system is designed for users speaking
in North American English, French, and Spanish accents, the system may not always work for some.
• When navigating through an automated system, such
as voice mail, or when sending a page at the end of
speaking the digit string, make sure to say ⬙send.⬙
• Storing names in phonebook when vehicle is not in
motion is recommended.
• It is not recommended to store similar sounding
names in the UConnect™ phonebook.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• UConnect™ phonebook nametag recognition rate is
optimized for the voice of the person who stored the
name in the phonebook.
• You can say ⬙O⬙ (letter ⬙O⬙) for ⬙0⬙ (zero). ⬙800⬙ must be
spoken ⬙eight-zero-zero.⬙
• Even though international dialing for most number
combinations is supported, some shortcut dialing
number combinations may not be supported.
Far End Audio Performance
• Audio quality is maximized under:
• low-to-medium blower setting,
• low-to-medium vehicle speed,
• low road noise,
• smooth road surface,
• fully closed windows, and
• dry weather condition.
81
• Operation from driver seat.
• Performance, such as audio clarity, echo, and loudness
to a large degree rely on the phone and network, and
not the UConnect™ system.
• Echo at far end can sometime be reduced by lowering
the in-vehicle audio volume.
Bluetooth Communication Link
Occasionally, Cellular phones have been found to lose
connection to the UConnect™ system. When this happens, the connection can generally be re-established by
switching the phone off/on. Your cell phone is recommended to remain in Bluetooth ⬙on⬙ mode.
Power-Up
After switching the ignition key from OFF to either ON
or ACC position, or after a reset, you must wait at least
five (5) seconds prior to using the system.
3
82
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
83
3
84
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
North American English
Primary
Alternate(s)
Zero
Oh
Add location
Add new
All
All of them
Confirmation prompts
Confirmations prompts
Delete a name
Delete
Language
Select language
List names
List all
List paired phones
List phones
Pager
Beeper
Phone pairing
Pairing
Phonebook
Phone book
Return to main menu
Return. Main menu
Select phone
select
Set up
Phone settings phone set
up
85
SEATS
Power Seats
The power seat switch is on the outboard side of the seat
near the floor. Use this switch to move the driver’s seat
up or down, forward or rearward, or to tilt the seat. The
passenger’s seat will move up or down, forward or
rearward.
Power Seat Switch
3
86
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat could
cause you to lose control. The seat belt might not be
properly adjusted and you could be injured. Adjust
the seat only while the vehicle is parked.
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under a power seat as it may
cause damage to the seat controls.
Power Seat Recline Switch
WARNING!
Power Reclining Seats
The recliner control is located on the outboard side of the
seat.
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt and
be seriously or even fatally injured. Use the recliner
only when the vehicle is parked.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Lumbar Support
This feature allows you to increase or decrease the
amount of lumbar support. Turn the control lever forward to increase and rearward to decrease the desired
amount of lumbar support.
87
The head restraints have a locking button, which must be
pushed in to lower the head restraint. The restraints may
be raised without pushing in the button.
3
Adjustable Head Restraint
Lumbar Support Control Lever
Head Restraints
Head restraints can reduce the risk of whiplash injury in
the event of impact from the rear. Adjustable restraints
should be adjusted so that the upper edge is as high as
practical.
Heated Seats
Heated seats provide comfort and warmth on cold days
and can help soothe sore muscles and backs. The heaters
provide the same heat level for both cushion and back.
The driver seat and front passenger seat are heated.
The controls for each heater are located near the bottom
center of the instrument panel. After turning on the
88
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
ignition, you can choose from High, Off, or Low heat
settings. Amber LEDs in the top portion of each switch
indicate the level of heat in use. Two LEDs will illuminate
for high, one for low, and none for off.
LEDs changes from two to one, indicating the change.
Operation on the low setting also turns off automatically
after 30 minutes.
NOTE: Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt
within two to five minutes.
WARNING!
Front Heated Seat Switch
Press the switch once to select high-level heating. Press
the switch a second time to select low-level heating. Press
the switch a third time to shut off the heating elements.
If high-level heating is selected, the system will automatically switch to the low level after 30 minutes of continuous operation. At that time, the number of illuminated
Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or other physical condition must exercise care
when using the seat heater. It may cause burns even
at low temperatures, especially if used for long
periods.
Do not place anything on the seat that insulates
against heat, such as a blanket or cushion. This may
cause the seat heater to overheat.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Folding Rear Seat
Folding Rear Seats
The rear seatbacks can be folded forward to provide an
additional storage area. Pull on the loops shown in the
illustration to fold down either or both seatbacks. These
loops can be tucked away when not in use.
When the seatback is folded to the upright position, make
sure it is latched by strongly pulling on the top of the
seatback above the seat strap.
89
WARNING!
• Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into
position. If the seatback in not securely locked
into position the seat will not provide the proper
stability for child seats and/or passengers. An
improperly latched seat could cause serious injury.
• The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle (with the
rear seatbacks in the locked-up or folded down
position) should not be used as a play area by
children when the vehicle is in motion. They
could be seriously injured in an accident. Children should be seated and using the proper restraint system.
3
90
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
DRIVER MEMORY SEAT — IF EQUIPPED
This feature allows the driver to store up to two different
memory profiles, for easy recall through a memory
switch. Each memory profile contains desired position
settings for the driver seat, side mirror, adjustable pedals,
and power tilt and telescopic steering column, and a set
of desired radio station presets.
The memory switch is located on the driver’s door panel.
The switch contains an (S) button to activate the memory
save function. It also contains a rocker switch labeled
with the number (1) and the number (2). The rocker
switch allows the driver to recall either of two preprogrammed memory profiles by pressing the appropriate side of the switch.
Memory Switch
Programming The Memory Feature
To create a new memory profile, perform the following:
NOTE: Saving a new memory profile will erase an
existing profile from memory.
1. Adjust all memory profile settings to desired preferences (i.e. seat, side mirror, adjustable pedals, power tilt
and telescopic steering column, and radio station presets).
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
2. Press and release the Set (S) button on the memory
switch, then press the side of the rocker switch labeled (1)
within 5 seconds. The Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC) will display which memory position is
being set.
If desired, a second memory profile can be stored into
memory as follows:
1. Adjust all memory profile settings to desired preferences (i.e. seat, side mirror, adjustable pedals, power tilt
and telescopic steering column, and radio station presets).
2. Press and release the Set (S) button on the memory
switch, then press the side of the rocker switch labeled (2)
within 5 seconds. The Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC) will display which memory position is
being set.
NOTE: Memory profiles can be set without the vehicle
in Park, but the vehicle must be in Park to recall a
memory profile.
NOTE: The Recall Memory with Remote Key Unlock
feature can be enabled or disabled. For details, refer to
91
“Recall Memory with Remote Key Unlock,” under “Personal Settings (Customer Programmable Features),” under “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in
Section 4 of this manual.
Linking & Unlinking the Remote Keyless
Transmitter to the Memory Feature
Your Remote Keyless Entry Transmitters can be programmed to recall one of two pre-programmed memory
profiles by pressing the UNLOCK button on the Remote
Keyless Entry Transmitter.
To program your transmitters, perform the following:
1. Remove key from ignition.
2. Select desired memory profile 1 or 2.
3. Press and release the Set (S) button on the memory
switch, then press and release the side of the rocker
switch labeled 1 or 2 accordingly. ⬙Memory Profile Set” (1
or 2) will display in the Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC).
4. Press and release the LOCK button on the transmitter
within 10 seconds.
3
92
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Your transmitters can be unlinked to your
memory settings by pressing the Set (S) button followed
by the UNLOCK button on the transmitter in Step 4
above.
Memory Position Recall
NOTE: The vehicle must be in Park to recall memory
positions. If a recall is attempted when the vehicle is not
in Park, a message will display in the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC).
To recall the memory settings for driver one, press
memory button number 1 on the driver’s door or the
“Unlock” button on the Remote Keyless Entry transmitter linked to memory position 1.
To recall the memory setting for driver two, press
memory button number 2 on the driver’s door or the
“Unlock” button on the Remote Keyless Entry transmitter linked to memory position 2.
A recall can be cancelled by pressing any of the memory
buttons (S, 1, or 2) on the drivers door during a recall.
When a recall is cancelled, the driver seat, side mirror,
adjustable pedals, and power tilt and telescopic steering
column stop moving. A delay of one second will occur
before another recall can be selected.
Easy Entry/Exit Seat (Available with Memory Seat
Only)
This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to
enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the
vehicle.
The distance the driver seat moves depends on where
you have the driver seat positioned when you remove the
key from the ignition switch.
• When you remove the key from the ignition switch,
the driver seat will move about 2.4 inches (60 mm)
rearward if the driver seat position is greater than or
equal to 3.5 inches (90 mm) forward of the rear stop.
The seat will return to its previously set position when
you insert the key into the ignition switch and turn it
out of the LOCK position.
• When you remove the key from the ignition switch,
the driver seat will move to a position 1.2 inches (30
mm) forward of the rear stop if the driver seat position
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
is between 2.4 inches and 3.5 inches (60 mm and 90
mm) forward of the rear stop. The seat will return to its
previously set position when you insert the key into
the ignition switch and turn it out of the LOCK
position.
TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD
Two latches must be released to open the hood. First, pull
the hood release lever located under the left side of the
instrument panel.
3
• The Easy Entry/Easy Exit feature is disabled when the
driver seat position is less than 2.4 inches (60 mm)
forward of the rear stop. At this position, there is no
benefit to the driver by moving the seat for Easy Exit
or Easy Entry.
Each stored memory setting will have an associated Easy
Entry and Easy Exit position.
NOTE: The Easy Entry/Easy Exit feature can be enabled or disabled. For details, refer to “Automatically
Move Seat Back on Exit,” under “Personal Settings (Customer Programmable Features),” under “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in Section 4 of this
manual.
93
Hood Release Lever
94
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Next, move to the outside of the vehicle and push the
safety catch to the left. The safety catch is located under
the center front edge of the hood.
Use the hood prop rod (if equipped) to secure the hood in
the open position.
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to
close it. Lower the hood, until it is open approximately 6
inches (15 cm), and then drop it. This should secure both
latches. Never drive your vehicle unless the hood is fully
closed, with both latches engaged.
WARNING!
If the hood is not fully latched, it could fly up when
the vehicle is moving and block your forward vision.
You could have a collision. Be sure all hood latches
are fully latched before driving.
Hood Safety Catch
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
LIGHTS
Headlight Switch
The headlight switch is located on the left side of
the instrument panel. This switch controls the
operation of the headlights, parking lights, instrument panel lights, instrument panel light dimming, interior lights, and fog lights.
Headlight Switch
95
Rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the first detent
for parking light and instrument panel light operation.
Turn it to the second detent for headlight, parking light,
and instrument panel light operation.
Automatic Headlights
This system automatically turns the headlights ON or
OFF according to ambient light levels. To turn the system
ON, rotate the headlight switch counter-clockwise to the
AUTO (A) position. When the system is ON, the Headlight Time Delay feature is also ON. This means the
headlights will stay ON for up to 90 seconds after you
turn the ignition switch OFF. To turn the Automatic
System OFF, move the headlight switch out of the AUTO
(A) position.
3
96
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The Headlights On with Wipers feature can be enabled or
disabled. For details, refer to ”Headlights On with Wipers,” under “Personal Settings (Customer Programmable
Features),” under “Electronic Vehicle Information Center” in Section 4 of this manual.
Headlight Switch
NOTE: The engine must be running before the headlights will come ON in the Automatic mode.
Headlights On with Wipers
When this feature is active, the headlights will turn on
approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on
if the headlight switch is placed in the AUTO position. In
addition, the headlights will turn off when the wipers are
turned off if they were turned on by this feature.
SmartBeams — If Equipped
The SmartBeam system provides increased forward lighting at night by automating high beam control through
the use of a digital camera mounted on the inside
rearview mirror. This camera detects vehicle specific light
and automatically switches from high beams to low
beams until the approaching vehicle is out of view.
To Activate:
1. Select “Automatic High Beams — ON” through the
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). For details,
refer to “Automatic High Beams,” under “Personal Settings (Customer Programmable Features),” under “Electronic Vehicle Information Center” in Section 4 of this
manual.
2. Rotate the headlight switch counter-clockwise to the
AUTO (A) position.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
3. Push the Multi-Function Lever away from you to
switch the headlights to the HIGH BEAM position.
NOTE: This system will not activate until the vehicle is
at or above 25 mph (40 km/h).
97
Headlight Time Delay
This feature provides the safety of headlight illumination
for 90 seconds (programmable) when leaving your vehicle in an unlighted area.
To Deactivate:
Perform either of the following steps to deactivate the
SmartBeam system.
To activate the delay feature, turn off the ignition switch
while the headlights are still on. Then, turn off the
headlights within 45 seconds. The delay interval begins
when headlight switch is turned off.
1. Pull the Multi-Function Lever toward you to switch
the headlights from the HIGH BEAM to the LOW BEAM
position.
If you turn the headlights, park lights, or ignition switch
on again, the system will cancel the delay.
2. Rotate the headlight switch clockwise from the AUTO
(A) to the ON position.
NOTE: Broken, muddy, or obstructed headlights and
taillights of vehicles in the field of view will cause
headlights to remain on longer (closer to the vehicle).
Also, dirt, film, and other obstructions on the windshield
or camera lens will cause the system to function improperly.
If you turn the headlights off before the ignition, they will
turn off in the normal manner.
NOTE: The lights must be turned off within 45 seconds
of turning the ignition off to activate this feature
The Headlight delay time is programmable. For details,
refer to “Delay Turning Headlights Off,” under “Personal
Settings (Customer Programmable Features),” under
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in Section 4 of this manual.
3
98
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Daytime Running Lights (Canada Only)
The high beam headlights will come on as Daytime
Running Lights, whenever the ignition switch is on, the
headlights are off, and the parking brake is off. The
headlight switch must be used for normal nighttime
driving.
Multi-Function Lever
The multi-function lever controls the operation of the
turn signals, headlight beam selection, and passing
lights. The lever is located on the left side of the steering
column.
Lights-on Reminder
If the headlights or parking lights are on after the ignition
is turned OFF, a chime will sound to alert the driver
when the driver’s door is opened.
Fog Lights
The front fog light switch is on the headlight
switch below the dimmer control. To activate the
front fog lights, turn on the parking lights or the
low beam headlights and press the fog light switch.
An indicator light in the instrument cluster illuminates
when the fog lights are turned on.
NOTE: The fog lights will operate with the low beam
headlights or parking lights on. However, selecting the
high beam headlights will turn off the fog lights.
Multi-Function Lever
Turn Signals
Move the Multi-Function Lever up or down and the
corresponding turn signal indicator in the instrument
cluster flashes to show proper operation of the front and
rear turn signal lights. You can also signal a lane change
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
by moving the lever partially up or down without
moving beyond the detent. Releasing the lever at the
detent will provide 3 flashes.
If either light has a very fast flash rate, check for a
defective outside light bulb. If an indicator fails to light
when the lever is moved, it would suggest that the fuse
or indicator is defective or there may be a circuit failure.
Overhead Console Map/Reading Lights
These lights are mounted between the sun visors on the
overhead console. Each light is turned ON by pressing
the lens. Press the lens a second time to turn OFF the
light. These lights also turn on when a door is opened, or
when the unlock button on the remote keyless entry
transmitter is pressed, or when the dimmer control is
turned fully upward, past the second detent.
NOTE: A “Turn Signal On” message will appear in the
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) and a continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is driven more
than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either turn signal on.
Highbeam/Lowbeam Select Switch
Push the Multi-Function Lever away from you to switch
the headlights to HIGH beam. Pull the Lever towards
you to switch the headlights back to LOW beam.
Flash to Pass
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
lightly pulling the Multi-Function Lever toward you.
This will cause the headlights to turn on at high beam
and remain on until the lever is released.
99
Overhead Console
3
100
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Interior Lights
The interior lights come on when a door is opened.
To protect the battery, the interior lights will turn off
automatically 10 minutes after the ignition switch is
moved to the LOCK position. This will occur if the
interior lights were switched on manually or are on
because a door is open. This includes the glove box light,
but not the trunk light. To restore interior light operation,
either turn the ignition switch ON or cycle the light
switch.
Dimmer Control
The dimmer control is part of the
headlight switch, and is located on the
left side of the instrument panel. With
the parking lights or headlights on,
rotating the dimmer control upward
will increase the brightness of the instrument panel lights.
Dome Light Position
Rotate the dimmer control completely upward to the
second detent to turn on the interior lights. The interior
lights will remain on when the dimmer control is in this
position.
Interior light Defeat (OFF)
Rotate the dimmer control to the extreme bottom “OFF”
position. The interior lights will remain off when the
doors are open.
Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness Feature)
Rotate the dimmer control upward to the first detent.
This feature brightens all text displays such as the
odometer, Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC),
and radio when the parking lights or headlights are on.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
The multi-function lever operates the windshield
wipers and washer when the ignition switch is in
the ON position. The lever is located on the left
side of the steering column.
Windshield Wiper/Washer Control
Rotate the end of the multi-function lever to the first
detent past the intermittent settings for Low-speed wiper
operation, or to the second detent past the intermittent
settings for High-speed wiper operation.
101
CAUTION!
Turn the windshield wipers off when driving
through an automatic car wash. Damage to the
windshield wipers may result if the wiper switch is
left in any position other than OFF.
Intermittent Wiper System
Use the intermittent wiper when weather conditions
make a single wiping cycle with a variable pause between cycles desirable. Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to the first detent position, and then turn
the end of the lever to select the desired delay interval.
There are six delay settings, which allow you to regulate
the wipe interval from a minimum of one cycle every
second to a maximum of approximately 23 seconds
between cycles.
3
102
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
two wipe cycles after releasing the lever and then resume
the intermittent interval previously selected.
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield
could lead to an accident. You might not see other
vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of
the windshield during freezing weather, warm the
windshield with defroster before and during windshield washer use.
If you activate the washer while the windshield wiper is
turned OFF, the wipers will operate for two wipe cycles
and then turn OFF.
Mist Feature
Push the multi-function lever inward (toward the steering column) to the first detent to activate a single wipe
cycle to clear off road mist or spray from a passing
vehicle. The wipers will continue to operate until you
release the lever.
Windshield Washers
To use the washer, push the multi-function lever inward
(toward the steering column) to the second detent and
hold it for as long as washer spray is desired.
If you activate the washer while the windshield wiper
control is in the delay range, the wipers will operate for
Headlights On with Wipers
When this feature is active, the headlights will turn on
approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on
if the headlight switch is placed in the AUTO position. In
addition, the headlights will turn off when the wipers are
turned off if they were turned on by this feature.
The Headlights On With Wipers feature can be enabled
or disabled. For details, refer to ”Headlights On with
Wipers,” under “Personal Settings (Customer Programmable Features),” under “Electronic Vehicle Information
Center” in Section 4 of this manual.
Rain Sensing Wipers
This feature senses moisture on the windshield and
automatically activates the wipers for the driver. This
feature is especially useful for road splash or over spray
from the windshield washers of the vehicle ahead. Rotate
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
103
the end of the multi-function lever to one of the six
intermittent wiper settings to activate this feature.
Features),” under “Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC)” in Section 4 of this manual.
The sensitivity of the system is adjustable from the
multi-function lever. Wiper delay position 1 is the least
sensitive and wiper delay position 6 is the most sensitive.
Choose setting 3 or 4 for normal rain conditions. Choose
setting 2 or 1 if you desire less wiper sensitivity. Choose
setting 5 or 6 if you desire more sensitivity. Place the lever
in the OFF position when not using the system.
The rain sensing system has protective features for the
wiper blades and arms. It will not operate under the
following conditions:
NOTE:
• The rain-sensing feature will not operate when the
wiper speed is in the LOW or HIGH position.
• The rain-sensing feature may not function properly
when ice or dried salt water is present on the windshield.
• Use of Rain-X威 or products containing wax or silicone
may reduce rain sensor performance.
• The Rain Sense feature can be enabled or disabled. For
details, refer to “Rain Sensing Intermittent Wipers,”
under “Personal Settings (Customer Programmable
• Low Temperature Wipe Inhibit — The rain-sensing
feature will not operate when the ignition is first
switched ON, and the vehicle is stationary, and the
outside temperature is below 32° F (0° C), unless the
wiper control on the multi-function lever is moved, or
the vehicle speed becomes greater than 0 mph (0
km/h), or the outside temperature rises above freezing.
• Neutral Wipe Inhibit — The rain-sensing feature will
not operate when the ignition is ON, and the transmission shift lever is in the N (Neutral) position, and
the vehicle speed is less than 5 mph (8 km/h), unless
the wiper control on the multi-function lever is moved
or the shift lever is moved out of the N (Neutral)
position.
3
104
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Adding Washer Fluid
The windshield washer fluid reservoir is located in the
front of the engine compartment on the passenger side of
the vehicle. Be sure to check the fluid level in the
reservoir at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with
windshield washer solvent (not radiator antifreeze) and
operate the system for a few seconds to flush out the
residual water.
Washer Fluid Reservoir
The fluid reservoir will hold nearly 1 gallon (4 liters) of
washer fluid when the message “Low Washer Fluid”
appears in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC).
WARNING!
Commercially available windshield washer solvents
are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care
must be exercised when filling or working around
the washer solution.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
HEADLIGHT WASHERS
The multi-function lever operates the headlight washers
when the ignition switch is in the ON position and the
headlights are ON. The multi-function lever is located on
the left side of the steering column.
To use the headlight washers, push the multi-function
lever inward (toward the steering column) to the second
detent and release it. The headlight washers will spray a
timed high-pressure spray of washer fluid onto each
headlight lens. In addition, the windshield washers will
spray the windshield and the windshield wipers will
cycle.
NOTE: The headlight washers will operate on the first
spray of the windshield washer and then every fourth
spray after that.
105
3
Headlight Washer
106
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Adding Washer Fluid
The headlight washer and windshield washer share the
same fluid reservoir. The reservoir is located in the front
of the engine compartment on the passenger side of the
vehicle. Be sure to check the fluid level in the reservoir at
regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with windshield
washer solvent (not radiator antifreeze) and operate the
system for a few seconds to flush out the residual water.
Washer Fluid Reservoir
WARNING!
Commercially available windshield washer solvents
are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care
must be exercised when filling or working around
the washer solution.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
POWER TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column
upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or
shorten the steering column. The power tilt/telescoping
steering column lever is located below the multi-function
lever on the steering column.
107
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Driver Memory
Seat, you can use your remote keyless entry transmitter
or the memory switch on the driver’s door panel to
return the tilt/telescopic steering column to preprogrammed positions. Refer to “Driver Memory Seat”
in this section for details.
WARNING!
Moving the steering column while the vehicle is
moving is dangerous. Without a stable steering column, you could lose control of the vehicle and have
an accident. Adjust the column only while the vehicle is stopped.
Power Tilt/Telescoping Steering
To tilt the steering column, move the lever up or down as
desired. To lengthen or shorten the steering column, pull
the lever toward you or push the lever away from you as
desired.
3
108
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
ADJUSTABLE PEDALS
The adjustable pedals system is designed to allow a
greater range of driver comfort for steering wheel tilt and
seat position. This feature allows both the brake and
accelerator pedal to move toward or away from the
driver to provide improved position with the steering
wheel. The switch is located on the front side of the
driver’s seat cushion side shield.
Adjustable Pedal Switch
Press the switch forward to move the pedals forward
(toward the front of the vehicle).
Press the switch rearward to move the pedals rearward
(toward the driver).
• The pedals can be adjusted with the ignition OFF.
• The pedals can be adjusted while driving.
• The pedals cannot be adjusted when the vehicle is in R
(Reverse) or when the Speed Control is ON. One of the
following messages will display in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) if a pedal adjustment
is attempted when the system is locked out: “Adjustable Pedal Disabled — Cruise Control Engaged” or
“Adjustable Pedal Disabled — Vehicle In Reverse.”
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Driver Memory
Seat, you can use your remote keyless entry transmitter
or the memory switch on the driver’s door panel to
return the adjustable pedals to pre-programmed positions. Refer to “Driver Memory Seat” in this section for
details.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
109
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under the adjustable pedals
or impede its ability to move as it may cause damage
to the pedal controls. Pedal travel may become
limited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in
the adjustable pedal’s path.
3
ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL
When engaged, this device takes over the accelerator
operation at speeds greater than 25 mph (40 km/h).
Electronic Speed Control Operation
The speed control lever (located on the left side of the
steering column) operates the system.
1
2
3
4
—
—
—
—
RESUME/ACCEL
SET/DECEL
CANCEL
ON/OFF
110
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To Activate:
Push the speed control lever inward (toward
the steering column) and release (“ON/OFF”).
The indicator light in the lever (and in the
instrument cluster on some models) will illuminate to show that the speed control system is ON. To
turn the system OFF, push the lever inward (toward the
steering column) again and release. At this time, the
system and the indicator light will turn off.
WARNING!
Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on
when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally
set the system or cause it to go faster than you want.
You could lose control and have an accident. Always
leave the system OFF when you aren’t using it.
To Set At A Desired Speed:
When the vehicle reaches the speed desired, push the
lever down and release (“SET/DECEL”). Remove your
foot from the accelerator pedal and the vehicle will
operate at the selected speed.
NOTE:
• Speed control will only function in third, fourth, or
fifth gear when in the Autostick威 Mode (if equipped).
• The speed control may not engage if a different size
tire is installed on one wheel, such as the compact
spare tire.
To Deactivate:
The system will disable Electronic Speed Control without
erasing the memory if you:
• Softly tap the brake pedal.
• Depress the brake pedal.
• Push the speed control lever away from you (“CANCEL”).
Pushing and releasing the lever (“ON/OFF”) or turning
off the ignition erases the set speed from memory.
To Resume Speed:
If you deactivated the speed control without erasing the
set speed from memory and your vehicle speed is above
20 mph (32 km/h) you can resume the previous set
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
111
speed. To do so, push the lever up and release (RES/
ACCEL), and then remove your foot from the accelerator
pedal.
To Accelerate For Passing:
Depress the accelerator as you would normally. When the
pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.
To Vary the Speed Setting:
When the speed control is set, you can increase speed by
pushing the lever up and holding (“RES/ACCEL”).
When the lever is released, a new set speed will be
established.
NOTE: The speed control system maintains speed up
and down hills. A slight speed change on moderate hills
is normal.
Pushing the lever up and releasing (“RES/ACCEL”) once
will result in a 1 mph (1.6 km/h) speed increase. Each
time the lever is pushed up and released, speed increases
so that pushing the lever up and releasing three times
will increase speed by 3 mph (4.8 km/h), etc.
To decrease speed while speed control is set, push the
lever down and hold (“SET/DECEL”). Release the lever
when the desired speed is reached, and a new set speed
will be established.
Pushing down and releasing the lever (“SET/DECEL”)
once will result in a 1 mph (1.6 km/h) speed decrease.
Each time the lever is pushed down and released, speed
decreases.
Four speed automatic transmissions will experience a
downshift to 3rd gear while climbing uphill or descending downhill. This downshift to 3rd gear is necessary to
maintain vehicle set speed.
On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur so
it may be preferable to drive without speed control.
WARNING!
Speed Control can be dangerous where the system
can’t maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could
go too fast for the conditions, and you could lose
control. An accident could be the result. Don’t use
Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads that are
winding, icy, snow-covered, or slippery.
3
112
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
REAR PARK ASSIST SYSTEM
The Rear Park Assist System is a driver aid that senses for
obstacles behind the vehicle. Refer to the Warnings,
Cautions, and Notes in this section for system limitations
and usage recommendations.
The Rear Park Assist System is active when the driver
shifts the transmission into the R (Reverse) position, and
the parking brake is not applied, and the vehicle speed is
less than 10 mph (16 km/h).
The system can be turned on or off when the vehicle is in
PARK through the Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC). For details, refer to “Personal Settings (Customer
Programmable Features)” under “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in Section 4 of this manual.
The system uses four sensors located in the rear bumper
to scan for obstacles up to 59 inches (150 cm) away from
the rear bumper fascia. The warning display located
above the rear window provides both visible and audible
warnings to indicate the range of the object.
Rear Park Assist Indicator
The warning display contains two sets of yellow and red
LEDs, one set to warn of obstacles behind the left rear of
the vehicle and the other set to warn of obstacles behind
the right rear of the vehicle. The driver can view the LEDs
either through the rear view mirror or by looking at the
display above the rear window.
The system dimly illuminates the two outer most yellow
LEDs when it is ON and detecting no obstacles. The
following chart shows the warning display operation
when the system is detecting an obstacle:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
113
WARNING DISPLAY DISTANCES
DISPLAY LED
1st LED
2nd LED
3rd LED
4th LED
5th LED
6th LED
7th LED
8th LED
OBSTACLE DISTANCE FROM:
REAR CORNERS
REAR CENTER
59 in. (150 cm)
47 in. (120 cm)
39 in. (100 cm)
31.5 in. (80 cm)
31.5 in. (80 cm)
25.5 in. (65 cm)
25.5 in. (65 cm)
20 in. (50 cm)
20 in. (50 cm)
16 in. (40 cm)
16 in. (40 cm)
6 in. (15 cm)
12 in. (30 cm)
NOTE: The Rear Park Assist system will MUTE the
radio, if on, when the system is sounding an audio tone.
LED COLOR
AUDIBLE SIGNAL
Yellow
Yellow
Yellow
Yellow
Yellow
Yellow
Red
None
None
None
None
None
None
at 12 in. (30 cm)
Intermittent
at 8 in. (20 cm)
Continuous
Red
3
114
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
CAUTION!
• Drivers must be careful when backing up even
when using the Rear Park Assist System. Always
check carefully behind your vehicle, look behind
you, and be sure to check for pedestrians, animals,
other vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots before backing up. You are responsible for safety
and must continue to pay attention to your surroundings. Failure to do so can result in serious
injury or death.
• Before using the Rear Park Assist System, it is
strongly recommended that the ball mount and
hitch ball assembly is disconnected from the
vehicle when the vehicle is not used for towing.
Failure to do so can result in injury or damage to
vehicles or obstacles because the hitch ball will be
much closer to the obstacle than the rear fascia
when the warning display turns the red LEDs ON.
Also, the sensors could detect the ball mount and
hitch ball assembly, depending on its size and
shape, giving a false indication that an obstacle is
behind the vehicle.
• The Rear Park Assist System is only a parking aid
and it is unable to recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles. Parking curbs might be
temporarily detected or not detected at all. Obstacles located above or below the sensors will not
be detected when they are in close proximity.
• The vehicle must be driven slowly when using the
Rear Park Assist System to be able to stop in time
when the obstacle is detected. It is recommended
that the driver looks over his/her shoulder when
using the Rear Park Assist System.
NOTE:
• Ensure that the rear bumper is free of dirt and debris
to keep the system operating properly.
• Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could
affect the performance of the system.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
115
If “Service Park Assist System” appears in the Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) after making sure the
rear bumper is clean please see your authorized dealer.
Courtesy/Reading Lights
OVERHEAD CONSOLE
The overhead console contains courtesy/reading lights,
an optional universal garage door opener (HomeLink威),
storage for sunglasses, and an optional power sunroof
switch.
Press the lens to turn on the light. Press it a second time
to turn off the light.
At the forward end of the console are two courtesy/
reading lights.
These lights also turn on when a door is opened, or when
the unlock button on the remote keyless entry transmitter
is pressed, or when the dimmer control is turned fully
upward, past the second detent.
Sunglasses Storage
At the rear of the console, a compartment is provided for
the storage of a pair of sunglasses.
The storage compartment access is a ⬙push/push⬙ design.
Push the finger depression on the overhead console to
open. Push the finger depression to close.
Overhead Console
3
116
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
GARAGE DOOR OPENER (HomeLink姞)
The HomeLink威 Universal Transceiver replaces up to
three remote controls (hand held transmitters) that operate devices such as garage door openers, motorized
gates, or home lighting. It triggers these devices at the
push of a button. The Universal Transceiver operates off
your vehicle’s battery and charging system; no batteries
are needed.
NOTE: The HomeLink威 Universal Transceiver is disabled when the Vehicle Security Alarm is active.
For additional information on HomeLink威, call 1–800–
355–3515, or on the internet at www.homelink.com.
WARNING!
• A moving garage door can cause injury to people
and pets in the path of the door. People or pets
could be seriously or fatally injured. Only use this
transceiver with a garage door opener that has a
“stop and reverse” feature as required by federal
safety standards. This includes most garage door
opener models manufactured after 1982. Do not
use a garage door opener without these safety
features it could cause injury or death. Call tollfree 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at
www.homelink.com for safety information or assistance.
• Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a dangerous gas. Do not run the vehicle’s exhaust while
training the transceiver. Exhaust gas can cause
serious injury or death.
• Your motorized door or gate will open and close
while you are training the Universal Transceiver.
Do not train the transceiver if people or pets are in
the path of the door or gate. A moving door or gate
can cause serious injury or death to people and
pets or damage to objects.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
117
Programming HomeLink
NOTE: When programming a garage door opener, it is
advised to park outside the garage. It is also recommended that you install a new battery in the hand-held
transmitter of the device being programmed. This will
allow for quicker training and accurate transmission of
the radio-frequency signal.
The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) features a driver-interactive display, which includes
HomeLink system messages. The EVIC is located in the
upper part of the cluster between the speedometer and
tachometer.
3
Electronic Vehicle Information Center
118
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
1. Press and hold the two outer HomeLink buttons.
Release the buttons only when the EVIC displays “Channels Cleared” (after 20 seconds); however, do not hold
the buttons for longer than 30 seconds. Do not repeat this
step if programming a second or third hand-held transmitter to the remaining HomeLink buttons.
3. Simultaneously press and hold the HomeLink button
(that you want to train) and the hand-held transmitter
button. Do not release the buttons until Step 4 is
complete.
NOTE: Some gate operators and garage door openers
may require you to replace this Programming Step 3 with
procedures noted under ⬙Gate Operator/Canadian Programming.⬙
4. The EVIC will display “Channel X Training” (where X
is Channel 1, 2, or 3). Release both buttons after the EVIC
displays “Channel X Trained.”
NOTE: If the EVIC displays “Did Not Train,” repeat
Steps 2–4.
HomeLink Buttons
2. Position the end of your hand-held transmitter 1-3
inches (3-8 cm) away from the HomeLink buttons.
5. Press and hold the just trained HomeLink button and
observe the EVIC display. If the EVIC displays “Channel
X Transmit” (where X is Channel 1, 2, or 3), then
programming is complete, and your device should activate when the HomeLink button is pressed and released.
NOTE: To program the remaining two HomeLink buttons, begin with ⬙Programming⬙ Step 2. Do not repeat
Step 1.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: If your garage door opener fails to respond to
the programmed HomeLink威 Universal Transceiver, and
your garage door opener is manufactured after 1995, it
may have a multiple security code system (rolling code
system). Please proceed to Steps 6–8 to complete the
programming of a rolling code equipped device (most
common garage door openers require this step.
6. At the garage door opener receiver (motor-head unit)
in the garage, locate the ⬙learn⬙ or ⬙smart⬙ button. This
can usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is
attached to the motor-head unit.
7. Firmly press and release the ⬙learn⬙ or ⬙smart⬙ button.
(The name and color of the button may vary by manufacturer.)
NOTE: You will have 30 seconds in which to initiate
Step 8.
8. Return to the vehicle and firmly press, hold for two
seconds, and release the programmed HomeLink button.
Repeat the ⴖpress/hold/releaseⴖ sequence a second time,
and, depending on the brand of the garage door opener
119
(or other rolling code equipped device), repeat this
sequence a third time to complete the programming.
HomeLink should now activate your rolling code
equipped device.
NOTE: To program the remaining two HomeLink buttons, begin with ⬙Programming⬙ Step 2. Do not repeat
Step 1. For questions or comments, please contact
HomeLink at www.homelink.com or 1-800-355-3515.
Canadian Programming/Gate Programming
Canadian radio-frequency laws require transmitter signals to ⬙time-out⬙ (or quit) after several seconds of
transmission, which may not be long enough for
HomeLink to pick up the signal during programming.
Similar to this Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are
designed to ⬙time-out⬙ in the same manner.
If you live in Canada or you are having difficulties
programming a gate operator by using the ⬙Programming⬙ procedures (regardless of where you live), replace
ⴖProgramming HomeLinkⴖ Step 3 with the following:
3
120
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: If programming a garage door opener or gate
operator, it is advised to unplug the device during the
⬙cycling⬙ process to prevent possible overheating.
3. Continue to press and hold the HomeLink button
while you press and release your hand-held transmitter
every two seconds until the frequency signal is accepted
successfully by HomeLink. The EVIC will display “Channel X Trained” (where X is Channel 1, 2, or 3). Proceed
with ⬙Programming⬙ Step 4 to complete the procedure.
Using HomeLink
To operate, simply press and release the programmed
HomeLink button. Activation will now occur for the
trained device (i.e. garage door opener, gate operator,
security system, entry door lock, home/office lighting,
etc.). For convenience, the hand-held transmitter of the
device may also be used at any time. In the event that
there are still programming difficulties or questions,
contact HomeLink at: www.homelink.com or 1-800-3553515.
Erasing HomeLink Buttons
To erase programming from the three buttons (individual
buttons cannot be erased but can be ⬙reprogrammed⬙ note below), follow the step noted:
• Press and hold the two outer HomeLink buttons.
Release the buttons only when the EVIC displays
“Channels Cleared” (after 20 seconds); however, do
not hold the buttons for longer than 30 seconds.
HomeLink is now in the train (or learning) mode and
can be programmed at any time beginning with ⬙Programming⬙ Step 2.
Reprogramming a Single HomeLink Button
To program a device a previously trained HomeLink
button, follow these steps:
1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink button. Do
NOT release the button.
2. The EVIC will display “Channel X Transmit” (where X
is Channel 1, 2, or 3) for 20 seconds and then change to
“Channel X Training.” Without releasing the HomeLink
button, proceed with ⬙Programming⬙ Step 2.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
For questions or comments, contact HomeLink at
www.homelink.com or 1-800-355-3515.
Security
If you sell your vehicle, be sure to erase the frequencies
by following the “Erasing HomeLink Buttons” instructions in this section.
POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED
The power sunroof switch is located between the sun
visors on the overhead console.
3
This device complies with part 15 of FCC rules and with
RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
• This device must accept any interference that may be
received including interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
HomeLink威 is a trademark owned by Johnson Controls,
Inc.
121
Power Sunroof Controls
122
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Never leave children in a vehicle, with the keys in
the ignition switch. Occupants, particularly unattended children, can become entrapped by the
power sunroof while operating the power sunroof
switch. Such entrapment may result in serious
injury or death.
• In an accident, there is a greater risk of being
thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You
could also be seriously injured or killed. Always
fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all
passengers are properly secured too.
• Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof. Never allow fingers or other body parts, or
any object to project through the sunroof opening.
Injury may result.
Opening Sunroof - Express
Press the switch rearward and release, and the sunroof
will open automatically from any position. The sunroof
will open fully and then stop automatically. This is called
Express Open. During Express Open operation, any
movement of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof.
Closing Sunroof - Express
Press the switch forward and release, and the sunroof
will close automatically from any position. The sunroof
will close fully and stop automatically. This is called
Express Close. During Express Close operation, any
movement of the switch will stop the sunroof.
Pinch Protect Feature
This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of
the sunroof during Express Close operation. If an obstruction in the path of the sunroof is detected, the
sunroof will automatically retract. Remove the obstruction if this occurs. Next, press the switch forward and
release to Express Close.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Pinch Protect Override
If a known obstruction (ice, debris, etc.) prevents closing,
press the switch forward and hold for two seconds after
the reversal occurs. This allows the sunroof to move
towards the closed position.
NOTE: Pinch protection is disabled while the switch is
pressed.
Venting Sunroof - Express
Press and release the ⬙V⬙ button, and the sunroof will
open to the vent position. This is called Express Vent,
which operates regardless of sunroof position. During
Express Vent operation, any movement of the switch will
stop the sunroof.
Sunshade Operation
The sunshade can be opened manually. However, the
sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens.
NOTE: The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is
open.
123
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
the rear windows open, then open the front and rear
windows together to minimize the buffeting. If the
buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, then adjust the
sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting or open any
window.
Sunroof Maintenance
Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean
the glass panel.
Ignition Off Operation
The power sunroof switch will remain active for up to 60
minutes after the ignition switch is turned off. Opening
either front door will cancel this feature. The time for this
feature is programmable. For details, refer to “Delay
Power Off to Accessories Until Exit,” under “Personal
3
124
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Settings (Customer Programmable Features),” under
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in Section 4 of this manual.
Sunroof Fully Closed
Press the switch forward and release to ensure that the
sunroof is fully closed.
NOTE: If desired, the power outlet next to the ash
receiver tray (if equipped) can be converted by your
authorized dealer to provide power with the ignition
switch in the LOCK position.
ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS
There are two 12-volt electrical outlets on this vehicle.
Both of the outlets are protected by a fuse.
The 12-volt power outlet next to the ash receiver tray (if
equipped with an optional Smoker’s Package) has power
available only when the ignition is on. This outlet will
also operate a conventional cigar lighter unit.
WARNING!
Do not place ashes inside the cubby bin located on
the center console on vehicles not equipped with the
ash receiver tray. A fire leading to bodily injury
could result.
Front Power Outlet
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The center console outlet is powered directly from the
battery (power available at all times). Items plugged into
this outlet may discharge the battery and/or prevent
engine starting.
Center Console Power Outlet
125
Electrical Outlet Use With Engine Off
CAUTION!
• Many accessories that can be plugged in draw
power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not
in use (i.e. cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s battery will
discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life
and/or prevent engine starting.
• Accessories that draw higher power (i.e. coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.); will degrade the
battery even more quickly. Only use these intermittently and with greater caution.
• After the use of high power draw accessories, or
long periods of the vehicle not being started (with
accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be
driven a sufficient length of time to allow the
alternator to recharge the vehicle’s battery.
• Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs
only. Do not hang any type of accessory or accessory bracket from the plug. Improper use of the
power outlet can cause damage not covered by
your warranty.
3
126
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CUP HOLDERS
Front Seat Cup Holders
The cup holders are located in the forward edge of the
center console.
Push down on the cover as shown to expose the cup
holders. Close the cover when the cup holders are no
longer needed.
Rear Seat Cup Holders
The rear seat cup holders are located in the center armrest
between the rear seats. The cup holders are positioned
forward in the armrest and side-by-side to provide
convenient access to beverage cans or bottles while
maintaining a resting place for the rear occupants’ elbows.
Rear Seat Cup Holders
Front Seat Cup Holders
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
STORAGE
Console Features
The center console contains a large storage bin. The
storage bin contains a four-slot coin holder (designed to
hold various size coins) and a rubber mat at the bottom of
the bin for noise control. The bin is large enough to hold
a portable AC/DC converter to power laptops, games, or
other electrical equipment. Two slots at the top right side
of the bin provide clearance for power cords to pass
conveniently out of the bin with the lid closed. This
feature is ideal for games, laptops, cell phones, or other
electrical equipment. The console’s front-opening lid
allows for easy access to the storage bin for the both the
driver and the front passenger. The inside portion of the
arm rest lid contains a penholder, a tissue holder, and a
tire gauge holder.
127
In addition to the internal storage, the console contains
two shift bezel cubby bins with rubber mats for holding
small items. For vehicles not equipped with navigation
radio, the console also contains an extra storage bin
located below the climate control, which holds up to four
CD jewel cases.
Cargo Area
The 60/40 split-folding rear seat provides cargo-carrying
versatility. The seatbacks fold down easily by pulling
nylon tabs between the seatbacks and the bolsters. When
the seats are folded down, they provide a continuous,
nearly flat extension of the load floor.
When the seatback is folded to the upright position, make
sure it is latched by strongly pulling on the top of the
seatback above the seat strap.
3
128
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
WARNING!
• Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into
position. If the seatback in not securely locked
into position, the seat will not provide the proper
stability for child seats and/or passengers. An
improperly latched seat could cause serious injury.
• The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle (with the
rear seatbacks in the locked-up or folded down
position) should not be used as a play area by
children when the vehicle is in motion. They
could be seriously injured in an accident. Children should be seated and using the proper restraint system.
• To help protect against personal injury, passengers should not be seated in the rear cargo area.
The rear cargo space is intended for load carrying
purposes only, not for passengers, who should sit
in seats and use seat belts.
• The weight and position of cargo and passengers
can change the vehicle center of gravity and
vehicle handling. To avoid loss of control resulting in personal injury, follow these guidelines for
loading your vehicle:
• Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor. Put
heavier objects as low and as far forward as possible.
• Place as much cargo as possible in front of the rear
axle. Too much weight or improperly placed weight
over or behind the rear axle can cause the rear of the
vehicle to sway.
• Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of the
seatback. This could impair visibility or become a
dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or collision.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
LOAD LEVELING SYSTEM
The automatic load leveling system will provide a levelriding vehicle under most passenger and cargo loading
conditions.
A hydraulic pump contained within the shock absorbers
raises the rear of the vehicle to the correct height. It takes
approximately 1 mile (1.6 km) of driving for the leveling
to complete depending on road surface conditions.
129
If the leveled vehicle is not moved for approximately 15
hours, the leveling system will bleed itself down. The
vehicle must be driven to reset the system.
3
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CONTENTS
䡵 Instrument Panel And Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
䡵 Premium Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
䡵 Instrument Cluster Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . 136
䡵 Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
▫ Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
▫ System Warnings
(Customer Information Features) . . . . . . . . . . 153
▫ Personal Settings
(Customer Programmable Features) . . . . . . . . 153
䡵 Setting The Analog Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
䡵 Radio General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
▫ Radio Broadcast Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
▫ Trip Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
▫ Two Types Of Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
▫ Compass Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
▫ Electrical Disturbances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
▫ Telephone — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
▫ AM Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
▫ Navigation — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
▫ FM Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
4
132
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
䡵 Sales Code RAK – AM/FM/Cassette/CD (6-Disc)
Radio With Optional Satellite Radio, Hands Free
Phone, Video, MP3, And WMA Capabilities . . 159
▫ Operating Instructions - Radio Mode . . . . . . . 159
▫ Operating Instructions — Tape Player . . . . . . . 162
▫ Seek Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
▫ Fast Forward (FF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
▫ Rewind (RW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
▫ Tape Eject . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
▫ Load/Eject Button (CD Mode For CD
Audio Play) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
▫ Notes On Playing MP3 Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
▫ Operation Instructions - (CD Mode For MP3
And WMA Audio Play) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
▫ Load/Eject Button (CD Mode For MP3 And
WMA Play) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
䡵 Sales Code REC — AM/FM/CD (6–Disc)
Radio With Navigation System . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
▫ Scan Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
▫ Operating Instructions — Satellite Radio (If
Equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
▫ Changing Tape Direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
▫ REC Setting The Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
▫ Metal Tape Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
▫ Audio Clock Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
▫ Pinch Roller Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
䡵 Video Entertainment System (Sales Code XRV) —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
▫ Noise Reduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
▫ Operation Instructions - (CD Mode For CD
Audio Play) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
▫ Kicker Mobile Surround (Kms1) . . . . . . . . . . . 175
䡵 Satellite Radio — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
▫ System Activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
▫ Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
Number (ESN/SID) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
▫ Selecting Satellite Mode In REF, RAQ, And
RAK Radios . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
▫ Selecting a Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
▫ Storing And Selecting Pre-Set Channels . . . . . . 178
▫ Using The PTY (Program Type) Button (If
Equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
133
▫ Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
▫ Tape Player Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
▫ CD Player Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
▫ Satellite Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
䡵 Cassette Tape And Player Maintenance . . . . . . 181
䡵 CD/DVD Disc Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
䡵 Radio Operation And Cellular Phones . . . . . . . 183
▫ PTY Button ⬙Scan⬙ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
䡵 Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
▫ PTY Button ⬙Seek⬙ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
▫ Automatic Temperature Control . . . . . . . . . . . 183
▫ Satellite Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
▫ Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
▫ Reception Quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
䡵 Rear Window Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
䡵 Remote Sound System Controls . . . . . . . . . . . 179
▫ Electric Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . 191
4
134
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS
1
2
3
4
5
— Air Outlet
— Instrument Cluster
— Hazard Switch
— Analog Clock
— Electronic Stability Program Off Button* /
Traction Control System Off Button*
6 — Glove Box
7 — Radio
8 — Climate Control
9 — Heated Seat Switch*
10 — Power Outlet
11 — Ash Tray*
12 — Storage Compartment*
13 — Ignition Switch
14 — Hood Release
15 — Trunk Release Switch
16 — Headlight Switch
* If Equipped
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
135
PREMIUM INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
4
136
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS
1. Electronic Speed Control Indicator Light — If
Equipped
This light will turn on when the electronic
speed control is ON. (See page 109 for more
information.)
2. Low Fuel Indicator Light
This light will turn on and a single chime will
sound when the fuel level drops to 1/8 tank. (See
page 249 for more information.)
3. Front Fog Light Indicator
This light will turn on when the front fog lights
are ON. (See page 98 for more information.)
4. Turn Signal Indicators
The arrow will flash with the exterior turn signal
when the turn signal lever is operated.
NOTE: A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is
driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either turn signal
on.
NOTE: Check for a defective outside light bulb if either
indicator flashes at a rapid rate. (See page 98 for more
information.)
5. Speedometer
Indicates vehicle speed.
6. Electronic Vehicle Information Center Display
This display shows the Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC) messages when the appropriate conditions
exist. (See page 144 for more information.)
Loose Fuel Filler Cap
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel
filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a
“Check Gascap” message will display in the Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Tighten the fuel filler
cap properly and press the odometer reset button to turn
off the message. If the problem continues, the message
will appear the next time the vehicle is started.
A loose, improperly installed, or damaged fuel filler cap
may also turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL).
(See page 272 for more information.)
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
7. Tachometer
The red segments indicate the maximum permissible
engine revolutions-per-minute (r.p.m. x 1000) for each
gear range. Ease up on the accelerator before reaching the
red area.
8. Engine Temperature Warning Light
This light will turn on and a single chime will
sound to warn of an overheated engine condition. When this light turns on, the engine temperature is critically hot. The vehicle should be turned
off immediately and serviced as soon as possible. (See
page 256 for more information.)
9. Anti-Lock Brake Light
This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System.
The light will turn on when the ignition switch
is turned to the ON position and may stay on for as
long as four seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving,
then the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system is not
functioning and service is required. However, the conventional brake system will continue to operate normally
if the BRAKE warning light is not on.
137
If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced
as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti-Lock
brakes. If the ABS light does not turn on when the
Ignition switch is turned to the ON position, have the
light inspected by an authorized dealer. (See page 211 for
more information.)
10. Electronic Stability Program (ESP) / Brake
Assist System (BAS) Malfunction Indicator Light
The yellow ESP/BAS malfunction indicator
light will turn on when the key in the
ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position. The light should go out with the engine
running. If the light remains on after several ignition
cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several miles at
speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see your
authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the
problem diagnosed and corrected. (See page 214 for
more information.)
11. Airbag Warning Light
This light will turn on for 6 to 8 seconds as a
bulb check when the ignition switch is first
turned ON. If the light is either not on
4
138
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
during starting, or stays on, or turns on while driving,
then have the system inspected at your authorized
dealer as soon as possible. (See page 46 for more
information.)
NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp
cornering maneuvers due to a change in fluid level. If so,
the vehicle should have service performed and the brake
fluid level checked.
12. Brake System Warning Light
This light monitors various brake functions,
including brake fluid level and parking
brake application. If the brake light turns on,
it may indicate that the parking brake is
applied, that the brake fluid level is low, or that there
is a problem with the anti-lock brake system.
Immediate repair is necessary if brake failure is indicated.
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capacity to a portion of the hydraulic system in the event of a
failure. Failure of either half of the dual brake system is
indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on
when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder drops
below a specified level.
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the brake light on is dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed. It will
take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have an
accident. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
Vehicles equipped with Anti-Lock brakes (ABS) are also
equipped with Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD).
Both the Brake Warning Light and the ABS Light will
turn on in the event of an EBD failure. Immediate repair
of the ABS system is required in the event of an EBD
failure.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked
by turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to
the ON position. The light should turn on for approximately two seconds and then turn off. The light will
remain on if the parking brake is applied or if a brake
fault is detected. If the parking brake is not applied and
the light remains on, or if the light does not turn on, have
the light inspected by an authorized dealer.
NOTE: The light will turn on when the ignition switch
in the ON position and the parking brake is applied. This
light shows only that the parking brake is applied. It does
not show the degree of brake application. (See page 211
for more information.)
13. Electronic Stability Program (ESP)/Traction
Control System (TCS) Indicator Light
If this indicator light flashes during acceleration, ease up on the accelerator and apply as
little throttle as possible. Adapt your speed
and driving to the prevailing road conditions, and do not switch off the ESP. (See page 214 for
more information.)
139
14. Temperature Gauge
The temperature gauge shows engine coolant temperature. Any reading within the normal range indicates that
the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily.
The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher temperature when driving in hot weather, up mountain grades,
or when towing a trailer. It should not be allowed to
exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage
your vehicle. If temperature gauge reads 240°F
(116°C) or greater, pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle
the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until
the pointer drops back into the normal range 200–
230°F (93–110°C). If the pointer remains at 240°F
(116°C) or greater and you hear a chime, turn the
engine off immediately, and call for service.
4
140
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. You may want to call a service center if your
vehicle overheats. If you decide to look under the
hood yourself, see Section 7 of this manual. Follow
the warnings under the Cooling System Pressure
Cap paragraph.
15. Trip Odometer Button
Press this button to change the display from odometer to
either of two trip odometer settings. The letter “A” or “B”
will appear when in the trip odometer mode. Push in and
hold the button for two seconds to reset the trip odometer
to 0 miles (kilometers). The odometer must be in trip
mode to reset it.
16. High Beam Light
This light will turn on when the high beam
headlights are ON. Push the Multi-Function
lever away from the steering wheel to switch the
headlights to high beam. (See page 98 for more
information.)
17. Transmission Range Indicator
This display indicator shows the automatic transmission
gear selection.
18. Seat Belt Reminder Light
This light will turn on for 5 to 8 seconds as a
bulb check when the ignition switch is first
turned ON. A chime will sound if the driver’s
seat belt is unbuckled during the bulb check. The Seat
Belt Warning Light will flash or remain on continuously if the driver’s seat belt remains unbuckled after
the bulb check or when driving. (See page 35 for more
information.)
19. Vehicle Security Alarm (VSA) Indicator Light —
If Equipped
The VSA indicator Light flashes rapidly when the VSA is
arming, and slowly when the VSA is armed. (See page 15
for more information.)
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
20. Fuel Gauge
The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank when
the ignition switch is in the ON position.
21. Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Light
This light will turn on briefly as a bulb check
when the ignition switch is turned ON. This
light will also turn on while the engine is
running if there is a problem with the Electronic Throttle Control system.
If the light comes on while the engine is running, safely
bring the vehicle to a complete stop as soon as possible,
place the gear selector in park, and cycle the ignition key.
The light should turn off. If the light remains lit with the
engine running, your vehicle will usually be drivable.
However, see your dealer for service as soon as possible.
If the light is flashing when the engine is running,
immediate service is required. In this case, you may
experience reduced performance, an elevated/rough idle
or engine stall, and your vehicle may require towing.
Also, have the system checked by an authorized dealer if
the light does not come on during starting.
141
22. Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light — If
Equipped
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked monthly when cold and
inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your
vehicle has tires of a different size than the size
indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire
inflation pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or
more of your tires are significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates,
you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible,
and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a
significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect
the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
4
142
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has
not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS
low tire pressure telltale.
The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will illuminate in the instrument cluster, and an audible chime will
be activated when one or more tire pressures is low. The
Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and
off for 60 seconds when a system fault is detected. The
flash cycle will repeat every ten minutes or until the fault
condition is removed and reset. (See page 239 for more
information.)
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warning have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using
replacement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. After-market wheels can cause
sensor damage. Do not use tire sealant from a can, or
balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a
TPMS, as damage to the sensors may result.
23. Voltage Light
This light monitors the electrical system voltage. The light should turn on momentarily as
the engine is started. If the light stays on or turns on
while driving, it indicates a problem with the charging
system. Immediate service should be obtained.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
24. Malfunction Indicator Light
This light is part of an onboard diagnostic
system called OBD. The OBD system monitors
engine and automatic transmission control systems. The light will turn on when the key is in the ON
position before engine start. If the light does not come
on when turning the key from OFF to ON, have the
condition checked promptly.
Certain conditions such as a loose or missing gas cap,
poor fuel quality, etc. may illuminate the light after
engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the light
stays on through several of your typical driving cycles. In
most situations, the vehicle will drive normally and will
not require towing.
143
The Malfunction Indicator Light flashes to alert you to
serious conditions that could lead to immediate loss of
power or severe catalytic converter damage. The vehicle
should be serviced as soon as possible if this occurs. (See
page 272 for more information.)
25. Oil Pressure Warning Light
This light shows low engine oil pressure. The
light should turn on momentarily when the
engine is started. If the light turns on while driving,
stop the vehicle, and shut off the engine as soon as
possible. A single chime will sound when this light
turns on.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected.
This light does not show how much oil is in the engine.
The engine oil level must be checked using the procedure
shown in section 7. (See page 275 for more information.)
4
144
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER
(EVIC)
• Vehicle information warning message displays
• Tire Pressure Monitor System (if equipped)
• Personal Settings (customer programmable features)
• Compass display
• Outside temperature display
• Trip computer functions
• UConnect™ hands-free communication system displays (if equipped)
• Navigation system screens (if equipped)
• Audio mode display
Electronic Vehicle Information Center
The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) features a driver-interactive display. It is located in the
upper part of the cluster between the speedometer and
tachometer. Vehicles equipped with steering wheel
mounted buttons (described in this section) are also
equipped with the EVIC. The EVIC consists of the
following:
• System Status
The system allows the driver to select information by
pressing the following buttons mounted on the steering
wheel:
Press and release the MENU button and the
mode displayed will change between Trip
Functions, Navigation (if equipped), System
MENU Status, Personal Settings, and Telephone (if
Button equipped).
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Press the FUNCTION SELECT button to accept
a selection. The FUNCTION SELECT button
also advances the radio to the next preset
FUNC- station, changes the side of the tape being
TION played (if so equipped), or changes the current
SELECT CD track being played (if so equipped) when
Button the EVIC is in the Compass/Temp/Audio
screen.
Press the SCROLL button to scroll through Trip
Functions, Navigation (if equipped), System
Status Messages, and Personal Settings (CusSCROLL tomer Programmable Features). The SCROLL
Button button also seeks up and down the radio
stations, CD track numbers (if so equipped), or
satellite radio channels (if so equipped) when the EVIC is
in the Compass/Temp/Audio screen.
Press the AUDIO MODE button to select the
Compass/Temp/Audio screen. This screen
displays radio station frequencies, any one of
AUDIO twelve radio station preset frequencies, CD
MODE disc number, CD track number, tape, or any
Button one of 200 Satellite radio channels depending
on which radio is in the vehicle.
145
If Compass/Temp/Audio is already displayed when the
AUDIO MODE button is pressed, then the radio mode
will change from AM to FM, to Tape, to CD, or to Satellite
(SAT) accordingly.
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Displays
When the appropriate conditions exist, the Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) displays the following
messages:
• Turn Signal On (with a continuous warning chime if
the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile [1.6 km] with
either turn signal on)
• Left Front Turn Signal Light Out (with a single chime)
• Left Rear Turn Signal Light Out (with a single chime)
• Right Front Turn Signal Light Out (with a single
chime)
• Right Rear Turn Signal Light Out (with a single chime)
• RKE Battery Low (with a single chime)
• Memory #1/#2 Profile Set
4
146
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Memory #1/#2 Profile Recall
• Memory System Disabled – Vehicle Not In Park (with
a single chime)
• Memory System Disabled – Seat Belt Buckled (with a
single chime)
• Adjustable Pedals Disabled – Vehicle In Reverse (with
a single chime) — only available on vehicles equipped
with memory seats.
• Channel 1, 2, OR 3 Transmit
• Channel 1, 2, OR 3 Training
• Personal Settings Not Available – Vehicle Not in Park
• Channel 1, 2, OR 3 Trained
• Left/Right Front Door Ajar (one or more, with a single
chime if speed is above 1 mph [1.6 km])
• Clearing Channels
• Left/Right Rear Door Ajar (one or more, with a single
chime if speed is above 1 mph [1.6 km])
• Door(s) Ajar (with a single chime if vehicle is in
motion)
• Trunk Ajar (with a single chime)
• Low Washer Fluid (with a single chime)
• Adjustable Pedals Disabled – Cruise Engaged (with a
single chime) — only available on vehicles equipped
with memory seats.
• Channels Cleared
• Channels Defaulted
• Did Not Train
• Left Front Low Pressure (with a single chime). Refer to
information on “Tire Pressure” and “Tire Pressure
Monitor” in the “Starting And Operating” section of
this manual.
• Left Rear Low Pressure (with a single chime). Refer to
information on “Tire Pressure” and “Tire Pressure
Monitor” in the “Starting And Operating” section of
this manual.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Right Front Low Pressure (with a single chime). Refer
to information on “Tire Pressure” and “Tire Pressure
Monitor” in the “Starting And Operating” section of
this manual.
• Distance To Empty
• Right Rear Low Pressure (with a single chime). Refer
to information on “Tire Pressure” and “Tire Pressure
Monitor” in the “Starting And Operating” section of
this manual.
• Elapsed Time
• Check TPM System (with a single chime). Refer to
information on “Tire Pressure Monitor” in the “Starting And Operating” section of this manual.
• Check Gascap (refer to “Adding Fuel” in Section 5 of
this manual for more details)
• Service Park Assist System (with a single chime)
• Upshift
Trip Functions
Press and release the MENU button until one of the
following Trip Functions displays in the EVIC:
• Average Fuel Economy
147
• Trip A
• Trip B
• Display Units of Measure in
Press the SCROLL button to cycle through all the Trip
Computer functions.
The Trip Functions mode displays the following information:
• Average Fuel Economy
Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset.
When the fuel economy is reset, the display will read
“RESET” or show dashes for two seconds. Then, the
history information will be erased, and the averaging will
continue from the last fuel average reading before the
reset.
4
148
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Distance To Empty (DTE)
Shows the estimated distance that can be traveled with
the fuel remaining in the tank. This estimated distance is
determined by a weighted average of the instantaneous
and average fuel economy, according to the current fuel
tank level. DTE cannot be reset through the FUNCTION
SELECT button.
NOTE: Significant changes in driving style or vehicle
loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of
the vehicle, regardless of the DTE displayed value.
• When the DTE value is less than 30 miles (48 km)
estimated driving distance, the DTE display will
change to a text display of ⬙LOW FUEL.⬙ This display
will continue until the vehicle runs out of fuel. Adding
a significant amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off
the ⬙LOW FUEL⬙ text and a new DTE value will
display.
• Trip A
Shows the total distance traveled for trip A since the last
reset.
• Trip B
Shows the total distance traveled for trip B since the last
reset.
• Elapsed Time
Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset
when the ignition switch is in the ACC position. Elapsed
time will increment when the ignition switch is in the ON
or START position.
• Display Units of Measure in:
To make your selection, press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until “US” or “METRIC” appears.
To Reset The Display
Reset will only occur while a resettable function is being
displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT
button once to clear the resettable function being displayed. To reset all resettable functions, press and release
the FUNCTION SELECT button a second time within 3
seconds of resetting the currently displayed function
(>Reset ALL will display during this 3 second window).
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Compass Display
The compass readings indicate the direction
the vehicle is facing. Press and release the
compass button to display one of eight comCOM- pass readings and the outside temperature.
PASS
Button
Automatic Compass Calibration
This compass is self-calibrating, which eliminates the
need to set the compass manually. When the vehicle is
new, the compass may appear erratic and the EVIC will
display “CAL” until the compass is calibrated. You may
also calibrate the compass by completing one or more
360° turns (in an area free from large metal or metallic
objects) until the “CAL” message displayed in the EVIC
turns off. The compass will now function normally.
Manual Compass Calibration
If the compass appears erratic and the “CAL” message
does not appear in the EVIC display, you must put the
compass into the Calibration Mode manually as follows:
1. Turn on the ignition switch.
149
2. Press and hold the compass button for approximately
2 seconds.
3. Press the SCROLL button until “Calibrate Compass”
displays in the EVIC.
4. Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button to
start the calibration. The message “CAL” will display in
the EVIC.
5. Complete one or more 360° turns (in an area free from
large metal or metallic objects) until the “CAL” message
turns off. The compass will now function normally.
Compass Variance
Compass Variance is the difference between magnetic
North and Geographic North. In some areas of the
country, the difference between magnetic and geographic
North is great enough to cause the compass to give false
readings. If this occurs, the compass variance must be set
using the following procedure:
NOTE: Magnetic materials should be kept away from
the overhead console. This is where the compass sensor is
located.
4
150
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
1. Turn the ignition switch ON.
2. Press and hold the compass button for approximately
2 seconds.
3. Press the SCROLL button until “Compass Variance”
message and the last variance zone number displays in
the EVIC.
4. Press and release FUNCTION SELECT button until
the proper variance zone is selected according to the
map.
5. Press and release the compass button to exit.
Telephone — If Equipped
Press and release the MENU button until “Telephone”
displays in the EVIC.
When the appropriate conditions exist, the EVIC provides the following telephone information:
• Phone status: idle, voice mail, roaming, battery
strength, and signal strength in increments of 20
percent.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Call status: Incoming call, connecting, connected, air
time in minutes and seconds, call ended, call failed,
roaming, and no phone connection.
• UConnect Active.
The EVIC displays this symbol to indicate that
the UConnect™ phone is currently in analog
mode.
Analog
The EVIC displays this symbol to indicate that
the UConnect™ phone is currently roaming.
• Caller ID phone number display.
When the appropriate conditions exist, and if supported
by the cell phone, the EVIC will display the following
telephone symbols:
The EVIC displays this symbol to indicate the
signal strength of the UConnect™ phone. The
number of horizontal bars increases as the
Signal strength of the UConnect™ phone signal inStrength creases.
4
Roaming
The EVIC displays this symbol to indicate that
you have voice mail.
Voice
Mail
The EVIC displays this symbol to indicate a
text message.
The EVIC displays this symbol to indicate an
incoming call.
Incoming Call
151
Text
Message
152
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The EVIC displays this symbol to indicate the
battery strength of the UConnect™ phone.
Battery
Strength
The EVIC displays this symbol to indicate that
a phone connection has been made.
Call in
Progress
The EVIC displays this symbol to indicate that
the UConnect™ phone is currently not available.
Phone
Not
Available
Navigation — If Equipped
Navigation Display Control
Press and release the MENU button until Navigation
displays in the EVIC. When the Navigation System is On,
the steering wheel buttons can be used to select the Map
or Menu display on the Navigation Unit. When the Menu
display is active, the SCROLL button can be used to scroll
through the list, the FUNCTION SELECT button can be
used to select an item, and the AUDIO MODE button can
be used to return to the previous menu. When the Map
display is active, pressing the FUNCTION SELECT button will change the Navigation Unit Display to the Menu.
Turn By Turn Directions
The EVIC displays turn-by-turn directions to a programmed destination when Turn by Turn Navigation is
enabled through Personal Settings. When enabled, the
EVIC displays the name of the approaching road at the
top of the screen, followed by an arrow to indicate the
direction to turn the vehicle, and a count down to
indicate the distance to the turn.
NOTE: Refer to your “Navigation User’s Manual” for
detailed operating instructions.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
System Warnings (Customer Information
Features)
Press and release the MENU button until “SYSTEM
WARNINGS” displays in the EVIC. Then, press the
SCROLL button to display anyone of the following
choices:
• Oil Temperature
Shows the actual oil temperature.
• Oil Pressure
Shows the actual oil pressure.
• Tire Pressure
Shows the actual tire pressure for each tire (EXCLUDING
THE SPARE TIRE).
Personal Settings (Customer Programmable
Features)
Personal Settings allows the driver to set and recall
features when the transmission is in PARK.
Press and release the MENU button until Personal Settings displays in the EVIC.
153
Use the SCROLL button to display one of the following
choices:
“Language”
When in this display you may select one of five languages for all display nomenclature, including the trip
functions and the navigation system (if equipped). Press
the FUNCTION SELECT button while in this display to
select English, Espanol, Deutsch, Italiano, or Francais.
Then, as you continue, the information will display in the
selected language.
NOTE: The EVIC will not change the UConnect™
language selection. Please refer to “Language Selection”
in the HANDS–FREE COMMUNICATION (UConnect™)
section of this manual for details.
“Lock Doors Automatically at 15 mph (24 Km/h)”
When ON is selected, all doors will lock automatically
when the vehicle reaches a speed of 15 mph (24 km/h).
To make your selection, press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until “ON” or “OFF” appears.
4
154
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
“Unlock Doors Automatically on Exit”
When ON is selected, all doors will unlock when the
vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the P (Park)
or N (Neutral) position and the driver’s door is opened.
To make your selection, press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until “ON” or “OFF” appears.
“Remote Key Unlock”
When Driver Door 1st Press is selected, only the driver’s
door will unlock on the first press of the remote keyless
entry unlock button. When Driver Door 1st Press is
selected, you must press of the remote keyless entry
unlock button twice to unlock the passenger’s doors.
When All Doors 1st Press is selected, all of the doors will
unlock on the first press of the remote keyless entry
unlock button. To make your selection, press and release
the FUNCTION SELECT button until “Driver Door 1st
Press” or “All Doors 1st Press” appears.
“Recall Memory with Remote Key Unlock” — If
Equipped
When ON is selected, you can use your Remote Keyless
Entry Transmitter to recall one of two pre-programmed
memory profiles. Each memory profile contains desired
position settings for the driver seat, side mirror, adjustable pedals (if equipped), and power tilt and telescopic
steering column (if equipped), and a set of desired radio
station presets. When OFF is selected, only the memory
switch on the driver’s door panel will recall memory
profiles. To make your selection, press and release the
FUNCTION SELECT button until “ON” or “OFF” appears. Refer to “Driver Memory Seat” in Section 3 of this
manual for more information.
“Sound Horn with Remote Key Lock”
When ON is selected, a short horn sound will occur when
the remote keyless entry “Lock” button is pressed. This
feature may be selected with or without the flash lights
on lock/unlock feature. To make your selection, press
and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until “ON”
or “OFF” appears.
“Rain Sensing Intermittent Wipers”
When ON is selected, the system will automatically
activate the windshield wipers if it senses moisture on
the windshield. To make your selection, press and release
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
155
the FUNCTION SELECT button until “ON” or “OFF”
appears. When OFF is selected, the system reverts to the
standard intermittent wiper operation.
selected. To make your selection, press and release the
FUNCTION SELECT button until “ON” or “OFF” appears.
“Automatically Move Seat Back on Exit” — If
Equipped
This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to
enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the
vehicle. To make your selection, press and release the
FUNCTION SELECT button until “ON” or “OFF” appears.
“Headlights On with Wipers”
When ON is selected, and the headlight switch is in the
AUTO position, the headlights will turn on approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on. The
headlights will also turn off when the wipers are turned
off if they were turned on by this feature. To make your
selection, press and release the FUNCTION SELECT
button until “ON” or “OFF” appears.
NOTE: The seat will return to the memorized seat
location (if Recall Memory with Remote Key Unlock is set
to ON) when the remote keyless entry transmitter is used
to unlock the door. Refer to “Easy Entry/Exit Seat” under
“Driver Memory Seat” in Section 3 of this manual for
more information.
“Flash Lights with Remote Key Lock”
When ON is selected, the front and rear turn signals will
flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the
remote keyless entry transmitter. This feature may be
selected with or without the sound horn on lock feature
NOTE: Turning the headlights on during the daytime
causes the instrument panel lights to dim. To increase the
brightness, refer to “Lights” in Section 3 of this manual.
“Delay Turning Headlights Off”
When this feature is selected, the driver can choose to
have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds
when exiting the vehicle. To make your selection, press
and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until “0,”
“30,” “60,” or “90” appears.
4
156
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
“Tilt Mirrors Down in Reverse”
When ON is selected, the outside rearview mirrors will
tilt downward when the ignition switch is in the ON
position and the transmission is in the R (Reverse)
position. The mirrors will move back to their previous
position when the transmission is shifted out of R (Reverse). To make your selection, press and release the
FUNCTION SELECT button until “ON” or “OFF” appears.
“Turn Headlights On with Remote Key Unlock”
When this feature is selected, the headlights will activate
and remain on for up to 90 seconds when the doors are
unlocked with the remote keyless entry transmitter. To
make your selection, press and release the FUNCTION
SELECT button until “OFF,” “30 sec.,” “60 sec.,” or “90
sec.” appears.
“Delay Power Off to Accessories Until Exit”
When this feature is selected, the power window
switches, radio, hands–free system (if equipped), DVD
video system (if equipped), power sunroof (if equipped),
and power outlets will remain active for up to 60 minutes
after the ignition switch is turned off. Opening a vehicle
door will cancel this feature. To make your selection,
press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until
“Off,” “45 sec.,” “5 min.,” “10 min.,” “30 min.,” or “60
min.” appears.
“Confirmation of Voice Commands” — If
Equipped
When ON is selected, all voice commands from the
UConnect™ system are confirmed. To make your selection, press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button
until “ON” or “OFF” appears.
“Park Assist System”
When ON is selected, the system will scan for objects
behind the vehicle when the transmission is in the R
(Reverse) or N (Neutral) position. To make your selection, press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button
until “ON” or “OFF” appears.
“Turn by Turn Navigation” — If Equipped
When ON is selected, the Turn-by-Turn directions will
appear in the display as the vehicle approaches a designated turn within a programmed route. To make your
selection, press and release the FUNCTION SELECT
button until “ON” or “OFF” appears.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
“Display Units of Measure in”
The EVIC, odometer, and navigation system (if
equipped) can be changed between English and Metric
units of measure. To make your selection, press and
release the FUNCTION SELECT button until “US” or
“METRIC” appears.
157
SETTING THE ANALOG CLOCK
To set the analog clock at the top center of the instrument
panel, press and hold the button until the setting is
correct.
“Automatic High Beams” — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the high beam headlights
will deactivate automatically under certain conditions. To
make your selection, press and release the FUNCTION
SELECT button until “ON” or “OFF” appears. Refer to
“SmartBeams” in section 3 of this manual for more
information.
4
Analog Clock
158
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
RADIO GENERAL INFORMATION
Radio Broadcast Signals
Your new radio will provide excellent reception under
most operating conditions. Like any system, however, car
radios have performance limitations, due to mobile operation and natural phenomena, which might lead you to
believe your sound system is malfunctioning. To help
you understand and save you concern about these “apparent” malfunctions, you must understand a point or
two about the transmission and reception of radio signals.
Two Types of Signals
There are two basic types of radio signals... AM or
Amplitude Modulation, in which the transmitted sound
causes the amplitude, or height, of the radio waves to
vary... and FM or Frequency Modulation, in which the
frequency of the wave is varied to carry the sound.
Electrical Disturbances
Radio waves may pick up electrical disturbances during
transmission. They mainly affect the wave amplitude,
and thus remain a part of the AM reception. They
interfere very little with the frequency variations that
carry the FM signal.
AM Reception
AM sound is based on wave amplitude, so AM reception
can be disrupted by such things as lightning, power lines
and neon signs.
FM Reception
Because FM transmission is based on frequency variations, interference that consists of amplitude variations
can be filtered out, leaving the reception relatively clear,
which is the major feature of FM radio.
NOTE: The radio, steering wheel radio controls, and 6
disc CD/DVD changer (if equipped) will remain active
for up to 60 minutes after the ignition switch is turned
off. Opening either front door will cancel this feature. The
time is programmable. For details, refer to “Delay Power
Off to Accessories Until Exit,” under “Personal Settings
(Customer Programmable Features),” under “Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in Section 4 of this
manual.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
SALES CODE RAK – AM/FM/CASSETTE/CD
(6-DISC) RADIO WITH OPTIONAL SATELLITE
RADIO, HANDS FREE PHONE, VIDEO, MP3, and
WMA CAPABILITIES
NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower
right side of your radio faceplate.
159
Operating Instructions - Radio Mode
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
Press the ON/VOL control to turn the radio ON. Press
the ON/VOL a second time to turn OFF the radio.
Electronic Volume Control
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360
degrees) in either direction without stopping. Turning the
volume control to the right increases the volume and to
the left decreases it.
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be
set at the same volume level as last played.
RAK Radio
Mode Button (Radio Mode)
Press the mode button repeatedly to select between the
CD player, Cassette, Satellite, or Vehicle Entertainment
System (VES) (if equipped).
SEEK Button (Radio Mode)
Press and release the SEEK button to search for the next
station in either AM/FM or Satellite (if equipped) mode.
4
160
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Press the right side of the button to seek up and the left
side to seek down. The radio will remained tuned to the
new station until you make another selection. Holding
the button and will bypass stations without stopping
until you release it.
SCAN Button (Radio Mode)
Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for
the next station, in either AM, FM or Satellite (if
equipped) frequencies, pausing for 5 seconds (satellite
scan 8 seconds) at each listenable station before continuing to the next. To stop the search, press SCAN a second
time.
Time Button
Press the time button and the time of day will display for
5 seconds.
Clock Setting Procedure
1. Press and hold the time button until the hours blink.
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side Tune/
Audio control.
3. After the hours are adjusted, press the right side
Tune/Audio control to set the minutes. The minutes will
begin to blink.
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side Tune/Audio
control.
5. To exit, press any button/knob or wait 5 seconds.
INFO Button (Radio Mode)
Press the INFO button for an RBDS station (one with call
letters displayed). The radio will return a Radio Text
message broadcast (if available) from an FM station (FM
mode only).
RW/FF (Radio Mode)
Pressing the rewind/fast forward button causes the tuner
to search for the next frequency in the direction of the
arrows. This feature operates in either AM, FM or Satellite (if equipped) frequencies.
TUNE Control (Radio Mode)
Turn the right side rotary control to increase or decrease
the frequency.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
161
AM/FM Button (Radio Mode)
Press the button to select AM or FM Modes.
Press the rotary TUNE control again to exit setting tone,
balance, and fade.
Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade
Press the rotary TUNE control and BASS will display.
Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to increase or
decrease the Bass tones.
RND/PTY Button (Radio Mode)
Pressing this button once will turn on the PTY mode for
5 seconds. If no action is taken during the 5-second time
out, the PTY icon will turn off. Turning the tune knob
within 5 seconds will allow the program format type to
be selected. Many radio stations do not currently broadcast PTY information.
Press the rotary TUNE control a second time and MID
will display. Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to
increase or decrease the Mid Range tones.
Press the rotary TUNE control a third time and TREBLE
will display. Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to
increase or decrease the Treble tones.
Press the rotary TUNE control a fourth time and BAL will
display. Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to
adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers.
Press the rotary TUNE control a fifth time and FADE will
display. Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to
adjust the sound level between the front and rear speakers.
Turn the tune knob to select the following format types:
Program Type
No program type or undefined
News
Information
Sports
Talk
Rock
Classic Rock
Adult Hits
16 Digit-Character Display
None
News
Information
Sports
Talk
Rock
Classic_Rock
Adult_Hits
4
162
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Soft Rock
Top 40
Country
Oldies
Soft
Nostalgia
Jazz
Classical
Rhythm and Blues
Soft Rhythm and Blues
Foreign Language
Religious Music
Religious Talk
Personality
Public
College
Unassigned
Weather
Soft_Rock
Top_40
Country
Oldies
Soft
Nostalgia
Jazz
Classical
Rhythm_and_Blues
Soft_R_&_B
Foreign_Language
Religious_Music
Religious_Talk
Personality
Public
College
Weather
By pressing the SEEK button when the PTY icon is
displayed, the radio will be tuned to the next frequency
station with the same selected PTY name. The PTY
function only operates when in the FM mode.
If a preset button is activated while in the PTY (Program
Type) mode, the PTY mode will be exited and the radio
will tune to the preset station.
NOTE: If you have selected a PTY with the tune knob,
simply pressing the tune button in will go directly to a
“PTY seek”.
Buttons 1 - 6 (Radio Mode)
These buttons tune the Radio to the stations that you
commit to push-button memory {12 AM, 12 FM, and 12
Satellite (if equipped) stations}.
Operating Instructions — Tape Player
Insert the cassette with the exposed tape side toward the
left and the mechanical action of the player will gently
pull the cassette into the play position.
NOTE: When subjected to extremely cold temperatures,
the tape mechanism may require a few minutes to warm
up for proper operation. Sometimes poor playback may
be experienced due to a defective cassette tape. Clean and
demagnetize the tape heads at least twice a year.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Seek Button
Press the SEEK button up for the next selection on the
tape and down to return to the beginning of the current
selection.
Press the SEEK button up or down to move the track
number to skip forward or backward 1 to 6 selections.
Press the SEEK button once to move 1 selection, twice to
move 2 selections, etc.
Fast Forward (FF)
Press the FF button up momentarily to advance the tape
in the direction that it is playing. The tape will advance
until the button is pressed again or the end of the tape is
reached. At the end of the tape, the tape will play in the
opposite direction.
Rewind (RW)
Press the RW button momentarily to reverse the tape
direction. The tape will reverse until the button is pressed
again or until the end of the tape is reached. At the end of
the tape, the tape will play in the opposite direction.
163
Tape Eject
Press this button and the cassette will disengage and eject from the radio.
Scan Button
Press this button to play 10 seconds of each selection.
Press the scan button a second time to cancel the feature.
Changing Tape Direction
If you wish to change the direction of tape travel (side
being played), press Preset 6. The lighted arrow in the
display window will show the new direction.
Metal Tape Selection
If a standard metal tape is inserted into the player, the
player will automatically select the correct equalization.
Pinch Roller Release
If ignition power or the radio ON/OFF switch is turned
off, the pinch roller will automatically retract to protect
the tape from any damage. When power is restored to the
tape player, the pinch roller will automatically reengage
and the tape will resume play.
4
164
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Noise Reduction
The Dolby Noise Reduction System* is on whenever the
tape player is on, but may be switched off.
To turn off the Dolby Noise reduction System: Press
Preset 1 after you insert the tape. The NR light in the
display will go off when the Dolby System is off.
* ”Dolby” noise reduction is manufactured under license
from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. Dolby
and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation.
Operation Instructions - (CD MODE for CD Audio
Play)
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
NOTE: Note: This Radio is capable of playing compact
discs (CD), recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable
compact discs (CD-RW) compact discs with MP3 tracks
and multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks
and WMA.
Inserting Compact Disc(s)
CAUTION!
This CD player will accept 4 3/4 inch (12 cm) discs
only. The use of other sized discs may damage the
CD player mechanism.
You may eject a disc with the radio OFF.
If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio
ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and
begin to play when you insert the disc. The display will
show the disc number, the track number, and index time
in minutes and seconds. Play will begin at the start of
track 1.
SEEK Button (CD MODE for CD Audio Play)
Press the right side of the SEEK button for the next
selection on the CD. Press the left side of the button to
return to the beginning of the current selection, or return
to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is
within the first 5 seconds of the current selection.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
SCAN Button (CD MODE for CD Audio Play)
Press the Scan button to scan through each track on the
CD currently playing.
LOAD/EJECT Button (CD Mode for CD Audio
Play)
LOAD/EJECT - Load
Press the LOAD/EJT button and the pushbutton with the corresponding number where
the CD is being loaded. The radio will display
PLEASE WAIT and prompt when to INSERT
DISC. After the radio displays ⬙INSERT DISC,⬙ insert the
CD into the player.
Radio display will show ⬙LOADING DISC⬙ when the disc
is loading and “READING DISC” when the radio is
reading the disc.
LOAD/EJT - Eject
Press the LOAD/EJT button and the pushbutton with the corresponding number where
the CD was loaded and the disc will unload
and move to the entrance for easy removal.
165
Radio display will show ⬙EJECTING DISC⬙ when the disc
is being ejected and prompt the user to remove the disc.
Press and hold the LOAD/EJT button for 5 seconds and
all CDs will be ejected from the radio.
If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within
15 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed,
the radio will continue to play the non-removed CD. If
the CD is removed and there are other CD’s in the radio,
the radio will play the next CD after a 2-minute timeout.
If the CD is removed and there are no other CD’s in the
radio, the radio will remain in CD mode and display
⬙INSERT DISC” for 2 minutes. After 2 minutes, the radio
will go to the previous tuner mode.
The disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.
TIME Button (CD MODE for CD Audio Play)
Press this button to change the display from a large CD
playing time display to a small CD playing time display.
4
166
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
RW/FF (CD MODE for CD Audio Play)
Press and hold FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player will
begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or
another CD button is pressed. The RW (Reverse) button
works in a similar manner.
TUNE Control (CD MODE for CD Audio Play)
Pressing the TUNE control allows the setting of the Tone,
Fade, and Balance. See Radio Mode.
AM/FM Button (CD MODE for CD Audio Play)
Switches the Radio to the Radio mode.
RND/PTY Button (Random Play Button) (CD
MODE for CD Audio Play)
Press this button while the CD is playing to activate
Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the
compact disc in random order to provide an interesting
change of pace.
NOTE: MP3 and WMA Random Play are for file folders
only.
Press the SEEK button to move to the next randomly
selected track.
Press and hold the FF button to fast forward through the
tracks. Release the FF button to stop the fast forward
feature. If the RW button is pressed, the current track will
reverse to the beginning of the track and begin playing.
Press the RND button a second time to stop Random
Play.
Buttons 1 - 6 (CD MODE for CD Audio Play)
Selects disc positions 1 - 6 for Play/Load/Eject.
Notes On Playing MP3 Files
The radio can play MP3 files; however, acceptable MP3
file recording media and formats are limited. When
writing MP3 files, pay attention to the following restrictions.
Supported Media (Disc Types)
The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are
CD-ROM, CD-R, and CD-RW.
Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)
The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660
Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.
When reading discs recorded using formats other than
ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
files properly and may be unable to play the file normally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.
The radio uses the following limits for file systems:
• Maximum number of directory levels: 15
• Maximum number of files: 255
• Maximum number of folders: 100
• Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:
• Level 1: 12 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a
3-character extension)
• Level 2: 31 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a
3-character extension)
Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio.
Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal
CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files).
Discs created with an option such as ⬙keep disc open after
writing⬙ are most likely multisession discs. The use of
multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in
longer disc loading times.
167
Supported MP3 File Formats
The radio will recognize only files with the *.mp3 extension as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.mp3
extension may cause playback problems. The radio is
designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will
not play the file.
When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to
an MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the
following table are supported. In addition, variable bit
rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files
use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or
VBR bit rates.
MPEG Specification
Sampling Frequency (kHz)
MPEG-1 Audio
Layer 3
48, 44.1, 32
MPEG-2 Audio
Layer 3
24, 22.05, 16
Bit rate (kbps)
320, 256, 224,
192, 160, 128,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32
160, 128, 144,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32, 24,
16, 8
4
168
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title
are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not
supported by the radios.
Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not
supported.
Playback of MP3 and WMA Files
When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the
radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium
contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more
time to start playing the MP3 files.
Loading times for playback of MP3 and WMA files may
be affected by the following:
• Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than
CD-R media
• Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer
to load than non-multisession discs
• Number of files and folders - Loading times will
increase with more files and folders
To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended
to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a
single-session disc, enable the Disc at Once option before
writing to the disc.
Operation Instructions - (CD Mode for MP3 and
WMA Audio Play)
SEEK Button (CD Mode for MP3 and WMA Play)
Pressing the right side of the SEEK button plays the next
file. Pressing the left side of the SEEK button plays the
beginning of the file. Pressing the button within the first
ten seconds plays the previous file.
LOAD/EJECT Button (CD Mode for MP3 and WMA
Play)
LOAD/EJT - Load
Press the LOAD/EJT button and the pushbutton with the corresponding number where
the CD is being loaded. The radio will display
PLEASE WAIT and prompt when to INSERT
DISC. After the radio displays ⬙INSERT DISC,⬙ insert the
CD into the player.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The radio display will show ⬙LOADING DISC⬙ when the
disc is loading.
LOAD/EJT - Eject
Press the LOAD/EJT button and the pushbutton with the corresponding number where
the CD was loaded and the disc will unload
and move to the entrance for easy removal.
Radio display will show ⬙EJECTING DISC⬙ when the disc
is being ejected and prompt the user to remove the disc.
If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within
15 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed,
the radio will continue to play the non-removed CD. If
the CD is removed and there are other CD’s in the radio,
the radio will play the next CD after a 2-minute timeout.
If the CD is removed and there are no other CD’s in the
radio, the radio will remain in CD mode and display
⬙INSERT DISC” for 2 minutes. After 2 minutes, the radio
will go to the previous tuner mode.
169
INFO Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
Press and INFO button while playing MP3 or WMA disc.
The radio scrolls through the following TAG information:
Song Title, Artist, File Name, and Folder Name (if available).
Press the INFO button once more to return to ⬙elapsed
time⬙ priority mode.
Press and hold the INFO button while in the message
display priority mode or elapsed time display priority
mode will display the song title for each file.
RW/FF (CD Mode for MP3 and WMA Play)
Press the FF side of the button to move forward through
the file or MP3 and WMA selection.
TUNE Control (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
Pressing the TUNE Control allows the adjustment of
Tone, Balance, and Fade.
AM/FM Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
Switches back to Radio mode.
4
170
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
RND/PTY Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
Pressing this button plays files randomly.
SET/DIR Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
Press the SET/DIR Button to display folders, when
playing an MP3 discs that have a file/folder structure.
Turn the TUNE control to display available folders or
move through available folders. Press the TUNE control
to select a folder.
Operating Instructions - Video Entertainment
System (VES) (If Equipped)
Refer to separate “Video Entertainment System (VES)
Guide.”
SALES CODE REC — AM/FM/CD (6–DISC) RADIO
WITH NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Buttons 1 - 6 (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
Selects disc positions 1 - 6 for Play/Load/Eject.
Operating Instructions - Hands Free Phone (If
Equipped)
Refer to “Hands-Free Phone” in Section 3 of the Owner’s
Manual.
Operating Instructions - Satellite Radio Mode (If
Equipped)
Refer to the “Satellite Radio” section of the Owner’s
Manual.
REC Radio
Satellite Navigation Radio with CD Player with MP3
Capability (REC) - combines a Global-Positioning
System-based navigation system with an integrated color
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
screen to provide maps, turn identification, selection
menus and instructions for selecting a variety of destinations and routes, AM/FM stereo radio and six-disc CD
changer with MP3 capability.
171
1. At the Main Menu screen, highlight “Clock Setup”
and press ENTER OR press and hold for 3 seconds the
TIME button on the unit’s faceplate. The Clock Setup
screen appears.
Mapping information for navigation is supplied on a
DVD that is loaded into the unit. One map DVD covers
all of North America. Refer to your “Navigation User’s
Manual” for detailed operating instructions.
4
Operating Instructions — Satellite Radio (If
Equipped)
Refer to your “Navigation User’s Manual” for detailed
operating instructions.
REC Setting the Clock
GPS Clock
The GPS receiver used in this system is synchronized to
the time data being transmitted by the GPS satellites. The
satellites’ clock is Greenwich Mean Time (GMT). This is
the worldwide standard for time. This makes the system’s clock very accurate once the appropriate time zone
and daylight savings information is set.
2. To show the GPS clock, select “Displayed Clock: GPS
Clock” and press ENTER.
3. To adjust the time zone, Select “Time Zone” and press
ENTER. Select the appropriate time zone and press
ENTER.
172
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
4. To turn daylight savings on or off, select “Daylight
Savings” and press ENTER. Select “On” or “Off” and
press ENTER.
5. Select DONE to exit from the clock setting mode. Press
ENTER to save your changes. If you press CANCEL or
NAV then your changes will not be saved.
User Defined Clock
If you wish to set the clock to a time different than the
system clock, you can manually adjust the time by
choosing the “User Defined Clock” option.
1. At the Clock Setup screen highlight “Displayed
Clock: User Defined Clock”.
2. To increase the clock by hours, make sure “HR +” is
highlighted and press ENTER. Press ENTER again to
increase the clock by another hour. You will see on the
“User Defined Time” display the number of hours you
have increased the clock by.
3. To decrease the clock by one hour, use the Select
Encoder to highlight the “-” sign. Press ENTER. Press
ENTER again to decrease the clock by another hour.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
4. To increase the clock by minutes, make sure “MIN +”
is highlighted and press ENTER. Press ENTER again to
increase the clock by another minute.
5. To decrease the clock by minutes, use the Select
Encoder to highlight the “-“ sign. Press ENTER. Press
ENTER again to decrease the clock by another minute.
6. Select “DONE” to exit from the clock setting mode.
Press ENTER to save your changes. If you press CANCEL or NAV then your changes will not be saved.
173
Audio Clock Display
Select this option to change the size of the clock on the
audio screens.
1. When you are at an audio screen, quickly press the
TIME button on the navigation faceplate.
2. In this example the large clock appears on the screen.
4
174
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
3. To switch the clock to the small clock, quickly press
TIME again.
VIDEO ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM (SALES CODE
XRV) — IF EQUIPPED
The optional VES™ (Video Entertainment System) consists of a DVD player and LCD (liquid crystal display)
screen, a battery-powered remote control, and two headsets. The system is located in the center console storage
bin under the armrest lid. Refer to your VES™ User’s
Manual for detailed operating instructions.
4. To toggle back to the large clock, simply press TIME.
Accessing The VES
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
175
4
Raising The DVD Screen
Remote Control Location
Kicker Mobile Surround (KMS1)
The VES for this vehicle comes equipped with Kicker
Mobile Surround (KMS1). This feature offers the ultimate
movie experience by providing surround sound uniquely
equalized for the interior space of your vehicle.
The KMS1 activates whenever a DVD is in the VES
player, and the radio mode is set to VES, and the video
screen is powered up. The system will go back to stereo
sound automatically if the VES is powered down, or the
176
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
video screen is stowed away, or the radio is set to a mode
other than VES, or if you are using the Aux jacks on the
VES.
Your vehicle is equipped with a state of the art digital
audio amplifier that decodes stereo sound inputs into 5.1
formatted surround sound. When in surround sound
mode, the KMS1 automatically sets balance and fade to
provide the optimal surround experience.
SATELLITE RADIO — IF EQUIPPED
Satellite radio uses direct satellite to receiver broadcasting technology to provide clear digital sound, coast to
coast. The subscription service provider is Sirius™ Satellite Radio. This service offers over 100 channels of music,
sports, news, entertainment, and programming for children, directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios.
System Activation
NOTE: Your vehicle’s radio must be on and in satellite
mode when the activation process takes place.
To activate your Sirius Satellite Radio service, call the
toll-free number 888-539-7474, or visit the Sirius web site
at www.sirius.com. Please have the following information available when activating your system:
1. The Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
Number (ESN/SID).
2. Credit card information.
3. Your Vehicle Identification Number.
Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
Number (ESN/SID)
The Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification Number is needed to activate your Sirius Satellite Radio
system. To access the ESN/SID, refer to the following
steps:
ESN/SID Access With REF Radios
With the ignition switch in the ACCESSORY position and
the radio OFF, press the CD Eject and Time buttons
simultaneously for 3 seconds. The first four digits of the
twelve-digit ESN/SID number will display. Press the
SEEK UP button to display the next four digits. Continue
to press the SEEK UP button until all twelve ESN/SID
digits display. The SEEK DOWN will page down until
the first four digits display. The radio will exit the
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
ESN/SID mode when any other button is pushed, the
ignition is turned OFF, or 5 minutes has passed since any
button was pushed.
ESN/SID Access With RAQ and RAK Radios
With the ignition switch in the ACCESSORY position and
the radio OFF, press the CD Eject and TIME buttons
simultaneously for 3 seconds. All twelve ESN/SID numbers will display. The radio will exit the ESN/SID mode
when any other button is pushed, the ignition is turned
OFF, or 5 minutes has passed since any button was
pushed.
ESN/SID Access With REC Navigation Radios
Please refer to your Navigation User’s Manual.
With the ignition in the ACCESSORY position and the
radio off, press the CD Eject and Set buttons simultaneously until the 12 digits of the ESN/SID appear on the
screen.
177
Selecting Satellite Mode in REF, RAQ, and RAK
Radios
Selecting Satellite Mode — REF Radio
Press the MODE button repeatedly until the word ⬙SAT⬙
appears in the display.
A CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio
mode.
Selecting Satellite Mode — RAQ and RAK Radio
Press the MODE button repeatedly until the word ⬙SAT⬙
appears in the display.
These radios will also display the current station name
and program type. For more information, such as song
title and artist press the MSG or INFO button.
A CD or tape may remain in the radio while in the
Satellite radio mode.
Selecting a Channel
Press and release the SEEK or TUNE knob to search for
the next channel. Press the top of the button to search up
4
178
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
and the bottom of the button to search down. Holding the
TUNE button causes the radio to bypass channels until
the button is released.
Press and release the SCAN button (if equipped) to
automatically change channels every 7 seconds. The
radio will pause on each channel for 7 seconds before
moving on to the next channel. The word ⬙SCAN⬙ will
appear in the display between each channel change. Press
the SCAN button a second time to stop the search.
NOTE: Channels that may contain objectionable content can be blocked. Contact Sirius Customer Care at
888-539-7474 to discuss options for channel blocking or
unblocking. Please have your ESN/SID information
available.
Storing and Selecting Pre-Set Channels
In addition to the 12 AM and 12 FM pre-set stations, you
may also commit 12 satellite stations to push button
memory. These satellite channel pre-set stations will not
erase any AM or FM pre-set memory stations. Follow the
memory pre-set procedures that apply to your radio.
Using the PTY (Program Type) Button (if
equipped)
Follow the PTY button instructions that apply to your
radio.
PTY Button ⴖSCANⴖ
When the desired program type is obtained, press the
⬙SCAN⬙ button within five seconds. The radio will play 7
seconds of the selected channel before moving to the next
channel of the selected program type. Press the ⬙SCAN⬙
button a second time to stop the search.
NOTE: Pressing the ⬙SEEK⬙ or ⬙SCAN⬙ button, while
performing a music type scan, will change the channel by
one and stop the search. Pressing a pre-set memory
button during a music type scan, will call up the memory
channel and stop the search.
PTY Button ⴖSEEKⴖ
When the desired program is obtained, press the ⬙SEEK⬙
button within five seconds. The channel will change to
the next channel that matches the program type selected.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Satellite Antenna
To ensure optimum reception, do not place items on the
roof around the rooftop antenna location. Metal objects
placed within the line of sight of the antenna will cause
decreased performance. Larger luggage items should be
placed as far forward as possible. Do not place items
directly on or above the antenna.
179
REMOTE SOUND SYSTEM CONTROLS
The remote sound system controls are located on the
surface of the steering wheel at the 3 and 9 o’clock
positions.
4
Reception Quality
Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the
following reasons.
• The vehicle is parked in an underground parking
structure or under a physical obstacle.
• Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the
form of short audio mutes.
• Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can
cause intermittent reception.
• Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can
cause signal blockage.
Electronic Vehicle Information Center
Vehicles equipped with steering wheel mounted buttons
are also equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC). The EVIC features a driver-interactive
display. This is located in the upper part of the instrument cluster between the speedometer and tachometer.
180
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
VOLUME
Button
The VOLUME button controls the sound level
of the sound system. Press the top of the
VOLUME button to increase the sound level.
Press the bottom of the VOLUME button to
decrease the sound level.
Press the AUDIO MODE button to select the
Compass/Temp/Audio screen. This screen
displays radio station frequencies, any one of
AUDIO twelve radio station preset frequencies, CD
MODE disc number, CD track number, tape, or any
Button one of 200 Satellite radio channels depending
on which radio is in the vehicle.
If Compass/Temp/Audio is already displayed when the
AUDIO MODE button is pressed, then the radio mode
will change from AM to FM, to Tape, to CD, or to Satellite
(SAT) accordingly.
When the EVIC is in the Compass/Temp/
Audio screen, press the FUNCTION SELECT
button to advance the radio to the next preset
FUNC- station, to change the side of the tape being
TION played (if so equipped), or to change the curSELECT rent CD track being played (if so equipped).
Button
when the EVIC is in the Compass/Temp/
Audio screen, press the SCROLL button to seek
up and down the radio stations, CD track
SCROLL numbers (if so equipped), or satellite radio
Button channels (if so equipped).
The following describes the operation of the SCROLL
button in each mode:
Radio Operation
Press the top of the SCROLL button once to SEEK the
next listenable station up from the current setting. Press
the bottom of the SCROLL button once to SEEK the next
listenable station down from the current setting.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Tape Player Operation
Press the top of the SCROLL button once to listen to the
next track on the cassette. Press the bottom of the
SCROLL button once either to listen to the beginning of
the current track or to listen to the beginning of the
previous track if it is within 5 seconds after the current
track begins to play.
Press either the top or bottom of the SCROLL button
twice to listen to the second track on the tape, three times
to listen to the third track, and so forth.
Press the FUNCTION SELECT button to change the side
of the tape being played.
CD Player Operation
Press the top of the SCROLL button once to listen to the
next track on the CD. Press the bottom of the SCROLL
button once either to listen to the beginning of the current
track or to listen to the beginning of the previous track if
it is within one second after the current track begins to
play.
181
Press either the top or bottom of the SCROLL button
twice to listen to the second track on the CD, three times
to listen to the third track, and so forth.
Satellite Radio Operation
Press the top of the SCROLL button once to SEEK the
next listenable station up from the current setting. Press
the bottom of the SCROLL button once to SEEK the next
listenable station down from the current setting.
CASSETTE TAPE AND PLAYER MAINTENANCE
To keep the cassette tapes and player in good condition,
take the following precautions:
1. Do not use cassette tapes longer than C-90; otherwise,
sound quality and tape durability will be greatly diminished.
2. Keep the cassette tape in its case to protect from
slackness and dust when it is not in use.
3. Keep the cassette tape away from direct sunlight, heat,
and magnetic fields such as the radio speakers.
4. Before inserting a tape, make sure that the label is
adhering flatly to the cassette.
4
182
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
5. A loose tape should be corrected before use. To rewind
a loose tape, insert the eraser end of a pencil into the tape
drive gear and twist the pencil in the required directions.
CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE
To keep the CD/DVD discs in good condition, take the
following precautions:
Maintain your cassette tape player. The head and capstan
shaft in the cassette player can pick up dirt or tape
deposits each time a cassette is played. The result of
deposits on the capstan shaft may cause the tape to wrap
around and become lodged in the tape transport. The
other adverse condition is low or “muddy” sound from
one or both channels, as if the treble tone control were
turned all the way down. To prevent this, you should
periodically clean the head with a commercially available
WET cleaning cassette.
1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the
surface.
As preventive maintenance, clean the head about every
30 hours of use. If you wait until the head becomes very
dirty (noticeably poor sound), it may not be possible to
remove all deposits with a simple WET cleaning cassette.
2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth,
wiping from center to edge.
3. Do not apply paper, paper CD labels, or tape to the
disc; avoid scratching the disc.
4. Do not use solvents such as benzine, thinner, cleaners,
or antistatic sprays.
5. Store the disc in its case after playing.
6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight.
7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may become
too high.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
RADIO OPERATION AND CELLULAR PHONES
Under certain conditions, the cellular phone being On in
your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from
your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated
by relocating the cellular phone antenna. This condition
is not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance
does not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the
antenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be
turned down or off during cellular phone operation.
183
Automatic Temperature Control
4
CLIMATE CONTROLS
The Air Conditioning and Heating System is designed to
make you comfortable in all types of weather.
Automatic Temperature Controls
Automatic Operation
The Infrared Dual-Zone Climate Control System automatically maintains the climate in the cabin of the vehicle
at the comfort levels desired by the driver and passenger.
To accomplish this, the system gathers information from
the controls on the climate control, from a dual sunsensor located in the top of the instrument panel, from an
infrared sensor located in the face of the climate control,
and from various sensors located throughout the vehicle.
184
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The controls on the climate control provide the system
with operator input. The dual sun-sensor monitors sun
load coming through the windshield. The infrared sensor
independently measures the surface temperature of the
driver and passenger. Other sensors take account of
vehicle-speed, A/C pressure, outside temperature, and
engine cooling temperature. Using all of these inputs, the
system automatically adjusts airflow temperature, airflow distribution, airflow volume, and the amount of
outside air recirculation. This maintains a comfortable
temperature even under changing conditions.
Operation of the system is quite simple. Begin by turning
the Mode Control knob (on the right) to AUTO, and place
the Blower Control knob (on the left) to either LO AUTO
or HI AUTO. The LO AUTO position should be used for
front seat occupants only. The HI AUTO position should
be used when more airflow is desired, or when rear seat
occupants are present. Then, dial in the temperature you
would like the system to maintain by rotating the driver
or passenger Temperature Control knob. Once the comfort level is selected, the system will maintain that level
automatically using the heating system. Should the desired comfort level require air conditioning, the system
will automatically make the adjustment.
You will experience the greatest efficiency by simply
allowing the system to function automatically. Selecting
the OFF position on the fan control stops the system
completely and closes the outside air intake.
72°F (22°C) is the recommended setting for maximum
comfort for the average person; however, this may vary.
NOTE: The temperature setting can be adjusted at any
time without affecting automatic operation.
Air conditioning in this system is automatic.
Pressing the Air Conditioning Control button
while in AUTO mode will cause the LED in the
control button to flash three times and then turn off.
This indicates that the system is in AUTO mode and
requesting the air conditioning is not necessary.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The system will automatically control recirculation. However, pressing the Recirculation Control button will temporarily put the
system in recirculation mode (ten minutes).
This can be used when outside conditions such as
smoke, odors, dust, or high humidity are present.
Activating recirculation will cause the LED in the
control button to illuminate. After ten minutes, the
system will return to normal AUTO mode function
and the LED will turn off.
NOTE:
• The surface of the climate control panel and the top
center of the instrument panel should be kept free of
debris due to the location of the climate control
sensors. Mud on the windshield may also cause poor
operation of this system.
• Extended use of recirculation may cause the windows
to fog. If the interior of the windows begins to fog,
press the Recirculation button to return to outside air.
185
Some temp/humidity conditions will cause captured
interior air to condense on windows and hamper
visibility. For this reason, the system will not allow
Recirculation to be selected while in defrost or
defrost/floor mode. Attempting to use the recirculation while in these modes will cause the LED in the
control button to blink and then turn off.
Manual Operation
This system offers a full complement of manual override
features, which consist of Blower Preferred Automatic,
Mode Preferred Automatic, or Blower and Mode Preferred Automatic. This means the operator can override
the blower, the mode, or both. There is a manual blower
range for times when the AUTO setting is not desired.
The blower can be set to any fixed blower speed by
rotating the Blower Control knob (on the left).
NOTE: Please read the Automatic Temperature Control
Operation Chart that follows for details.
4
186
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The operator can override the AUTO mode setting to
change airflow distribution by rotating the Mode Control
knob (on the right) to one of the following positions.
• Defrost
Air is directed to the windshield through the
outlets at the base of the windshield. Air is
also directed to the front door windows through the
side window demister grilles.
• Defrost/Floor
Air flows through the front and rear floor
outlets and the outlets at the base of the
windshield. Air is also directed to the front
door windows through the side window demister
grilles.
• Floor
Air flows through the floor outlets located
under the instrument panel and into the rear
seating area through vents under the front seats.
187
• Bi-Level
Air flows through the outlets located in the
instrument panel and through the outlets located on the floor. Air flows through the registers in
the back of the center console to the rear seat
passengers. These registers can be closed to block
airflow.
• Panel
Air flows through the outlets located in the
instrument panel. Air flows through the registers in the back of the center console to the rear seat
passengers. These registers can be closed to block
airflow.
• Air Conditioning Control
Press this button to turn on the air conditioning during manual operation only. When the
air conditioning is turned on, cool dehumidified air will flow through the outlets selected with
the Mode control dial. Press this button a second
time to turn off the air conditioning. An LED in the
button illuminates when manual compressor operation is selected.
4
188
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: To control the air conditioning manually, the
mode selector must be moved out of the AUTO position.
• Recirculation Control
This button can be used to block out smoke,
odors, dust, high humidity, or if rapid cooling
is desired. The recirculation mode should only
be used temporarily. An LED in the button
illuminates when the recirculation mode is active. You
may use this feature separately.
NOTE: Extended use of recirculation may cause the
windows to fog. If the interior of the windows begins to
fog, press the Recirculation button to return to outside
air. Some temp/humidity conditions will cause captured
interior air to condense on windows and hamper visibility. For this reason, the system will not allow Recirculation to be selected while in defrost or defrost/floor mode.
Attempting to use the recirculation while in these modes
will cause the LED in the control button to blink and then
turn off.
Operating Tips
NOTE: Refer to the chart at the end of this section for
suggested control settings for various weather conditions.
Summer Operation
The engine cooling system in air-conditioned vehicles
must be protected with a high-quality antifreeze coolant
to provide proper corrosion protection and to protect
against engine overheating. A 50% solution of ethylene
glycol antifreeze coolant in water is recommended. Refer
to “Maintenance Procedures” in Section 7 of this manual
for proper coolant selection.
Winter Operation
Use of the air Recirculation mode during winter months
is not recommended because it may cause window
fogging.
Vacation Storage
Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of service
(i.e. vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh
air and high blower setting. This will insure adequate
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system is started again.
Window Fogging
Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly removed by turning the mode selector to Defrost. The
Defrost/Floor mode can be used to maintain a clear
windshield and provide sufficient heating. If side window fogging becomes a problem increase blower speed.
Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild but
rainy or humid weather.
NOTE: Recirculate without A/C should not be used for
long periods as fogging may occur.
189
Outside Air Intake
Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the
windshield, is free of obstructions such as leaves. Leaves
collected in the air intake may reduce airflow, and if they
enter the plenum, they could plug the water drains. In
winter months, make sure the air intake is clear of ice,
slush, and snow.
A/C Air Filter — If Equipped
The climate control system filters outside air containing
dust, pollen and some odors. Strong odors cannot be
totally filtered out. Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in
Section 7 of this manual for filter replacement instructions.
4
190
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Control Setting Suggestions for Various Weather Conditions
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
REAR WINDOW FEATURES
Electric Rear Window Defroster
The electric Rear Window Defroster Control is
located on the climate control. Press this button to
turn on the rear window defroster and the heated side
mirrors (if equipped). An LED in the button will illuminate when the rear window defroster is ON. The defroster automatically turns off after approximately 10
minutes of operation for the first push of the button, and
will turn off after approximately 5 minutes for the second
push of the button.
191
CAUTION!
To avoid damaging the electrical conductors of the
rear window defroster, do not use scrapers, sharp
instruments, or abrasive window cleaners on the
interior surface of the window.
Labels can be peeled off after soaking with warm
water.
4
STARTING AND OPERATING
CONTENTS
䡵 Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
▫ 5 Speed Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . 203
▫ Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
䡵 AutoStick威 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
▫ Normal Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
▫ AutoStick威 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
▫ Extremely Cold Weather
(Below ⫺20°F Or ⫺29°C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
▫ AutoStick威 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . 208
▫ If Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
▫ After Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
䡵 Engine Block Heater — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 199
䡵 Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
▫ Automatic Transmission —
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
▫ Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System . . . 202
䡵 Driving On Slippery Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
▫ Acceleration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
▫ Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
䡵 Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
䡵 Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
▫ Anti-Lock Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
䡵 Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
5
194
STARTING AND OPERATING
䡵 Electronic Brake Control System . . . . . . . . . . . 214
▫ Tire Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
▫ ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System) . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
▫ Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
▫ TCS (Traction Control System) . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
▫ Life Of Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
▫ BAS (Brake Assist System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
▫ Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
▫ ESP (Electronic Stability Program) . . . . . . . . . 216
▫ Alignment And Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
▫ Synchronizing ESP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
䡵 Tire Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
▫ ESP/BAS Malfunction Indicator Light And
ESP/TCS Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
䡵 Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
䡵 Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
▫ Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
▫ Tire Identification Number (TIN) . . . . . . . . . . 224
䡵 Tire Rotation Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . 237
▫ Tire Rotation — Standard Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
▫ Tire Rotation — All Season Tires . . . . . . . . . . 238
▫ Tire Loading And Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . 225
䡵 Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
䡵 Tires — General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
▫ Base System — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
▫ Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
▫ Premium System — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . 242
▫ Tire Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
▫ Radial-Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
䡵 Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
STARTING AND OPERATING
195
▫ 6.1L Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
▫ Vehicle Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
▫ Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
▫ Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) . . . . . . . 252
▫ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
▫ Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) . . . . . . . . . 252
▫ MMT In Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
▫ Overloading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
▫ Materials Added To Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
▫ Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
▫ Fuel System Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
䡵 Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
▫ Carbon Monoxide Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
䡵 Recreational Towing
(Behind Motorhome, Etc.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
䡵 Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
▫ Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle
(Flat Towing With All Four Wheels On The
Ground) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
䡵 Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
䡵 Ground Clearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
▫ Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
5
196
STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING PROCEDURES
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust the
inside and outside mirrors, fasten your seat belt, and if
present, instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat
belts.
WARNING!
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
children in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for
a number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Don’t leave the keys
in the ignition. A child could operate power
windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
• Do not leave animals or children inside parked
vehicles in hot weather; interior heat build up
may cause serious injury or death.
• Be sure to turn off the engine if you want to rest or
sleep in your car. Accidents can be caused by
inadvertently moving the gear selection lever or
by pressing the accelerator pedal. This may cause
excessive heat in the exhaust system, resulting in
overheating and vehicle fire, which may cause
serious or fatal injuries.
STARTING AND OPERATING
Automatic Transmission
The gear selector must be in the NEUTRAL or PARK
position before you can start the engine. Apply the brakes
before shifting into any driving gear.
Normal Starting
Normal Starting of either a cold or a warm engine is
obtained without pumping or depressing the accelerator
pedal. Turn the key to the “START” position and release
when the engine starts. If the engine has not started
within 3 seconds, slightly depress the accelerator pedal
while continuing to crank. If the engine fails to start
within 15 seconds, turn the key to the “LOCK” position,
wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the normal starting
procedure.
Extremely Cold Weather (below ⫺20°F or ⫺29°C)
To insure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of an
externally powered electric engine block heater (available
from your dealer) is recommended.
197
If Engine Fails To Start
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the
“NORMAL STARTING” procedure, it may be flooded.
Push the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and
hold it there while cranking the engine. This should clear
any excess fuel in case the engine is flooded.
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, do not crank the
engine for more than 15 seconds at a time. Wait 10 to
15 seconds before trying again.
5
198
STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
• Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into
the throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to
start the vehicle. This could result in flash fire
causing serious personal injury.
• Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get
it started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic
transmission cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic converter and
once the engine has started, ignite and damage the
converter and vehicle. If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster cables may be used to
obtain a start from a booster battery or the battery
in another vehicle. This type of start can be
dangerous if done improperly. See section 6 of
this manual for the proper jump-starting procedures and follow them carefully.
If the engine is flooded, it may start to run, but not have
enough power to continue running when the key is
released. If this occurs, continue cranking up to 15
seconds with the accelerator pedal pushed all the way to
the floor. Release the accelerator pedal and the key once
the engine is running smoothly. Do not overspeed the
engine.
If the engine shows no sign of starting after two 15second periods of cranking with the accelerator pedal
held to the floor, the “NORMAL STARTING” procedure
should be repeated.
After Starting
The idle speed is controlled automatically and it will
decrease as the engine warms up.
STARTING AND OPERATING
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED
The engine block heater warms engine coolant and
permits quicker starts in cold weather. Connect the cord
to a standard 110-115 volt AC electrical outlet with a
grounded, three-wire extension cord.
The engine block heater cord is routed under the hood on
the driver side of the vehicle. It has a removable cap that
is located on the driver side of the Integrated Power
Module.
WARNING!
Remember to disconnect the cord before driving.
Damage to the 110-115 volt electrical cord could
cause electrocution.
199
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the following precautions are not observed:
• Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to
a complete stop.
• Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the
vehicle has come to a complete stop and the
engine is at idle speed.
• Do not shift from REVERSE, PARK, or NEUTRAL
into any forward gear when the engine is above
idle speed.
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
is firmly on the brake pedal.
5
200
STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
It is dangerous to shift the selector lever out of “P” or
“N” if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If
your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal, the
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when
the engine is idling normally and when your right
foot is firmly on the brake pedal.
Automatic Transmission — General Information
The automatic transmission selects individual gears automatically, dependent upon:
• Altitude
• Vehicle Loading
• Driving Style
• Selector lever position
• Accelerator position
• Vehicle speed
The gear shifting process is continuously adapted, dependent on the driving style, the driving situation and
the road characteristics.
NOTE:
• After selecting any driving position, wait a moment to
allow the gear to engage fully before accelerating,
especially when the engine is cold.
• If there is a need to restart the engine, be sure to cycle
the key to the LOCK position before restarting. Transmission engagement may be delayed up to 10 seconds
after restart if the key is not cycled to the LOCK
position first.
• The electronically controlled transmission provides a
precise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are
self-calibrating. Therefore, the first few shifts on a new
vehicle may be somewhat abrupt or soft until after the
break-in period. This is a normal condition, and precision shifts will develop within a few shift cycles.
STARTING AND OPERATING
The selector lever is automatically locked while in the P
(Park) position. To move the selector lever out of the P
(Park) position, the brake pedal must be firmly depressed
before the shift lock will release.
Shift the selector lever to the desired position only when
the engine is idling normally and the brake pedal is
applied. Do not release the brake until ready to drive. The
vehicle may otherwise accelerate quickly when the selector lever is in D (Drive) or R (Reverse) position.
201
WARNING!
Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in and near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, you should always
shift the vehicle into P (Park), remove the key from
the ignition, and apply the parking brake. Once the
key is removed from the ignition, the transmission
selector lever is locked in the P (Park) position,
securing the vehicle against unwanted movement.
Furthermore, you should never leave children unattended inside a vehicle.
Over Temperature Mode
The transmission electronics constantly monitor the
transmission oil temperature. If the transmission exceeds
normal operating temperature, the transmission will
change the way it shifts to help control the condition.
This may result in a slightly different feeling or response
during normal operation in D (Drive) position. After the
transmission cools down, it will return to normal operation.
5
202
STARTING AND OPERATING
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System
This vehicle is equipped with a brake transmission shift
interlock system (BTSI) that holds the selector lever in the
P (Park) position when the ignition switch is in the LOCK
position. To move the gear selector lever out of the P
(Park) position, the ignition switch must be turned to the
ON position, and the brake pedal must be depressed.
Brake Interlock Override
For electrical system malfunctions, there is an override
for the interlock system. In order to override this system
the key must be in the ignition with the switch in the
ACC or ON positions. Remove the rubber storage tray
from the bin located to the right of the shifter lever. The
override can be activated by pressing the pink-colored
tab, which can be accessed through a hole inside the bin.
While the override is pressed, the shifter can be moved
out of the park position without pressing the brake. After
operation, return the rubber storage tray to its original
position.
STARTING AND OPERATING
5 Speed Automatic Transmission
Shifting from D (Drive) to P (Park) or R (Reverse) (or
from P or R to D) should be done only after the
accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped.
Be sure to keep your foot on the brake when moving the
selector lever between these gears.
203
Never use P (Park) while the vehicle is in motion.
Apply the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in
this range.
When parking on a flat surface, place the gear selector in
the P (Park) position first, and then apply the parking
brake.
When parking on a hill, it is important to set the parking
brake before placing the gear selector in P (Park), otherwise the load on the transmission locking mechanism
may make it difficult to move the selector out of park. As
an added precaution, turn the front wheels toward the
curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an
uphill grade.
WARNING!
Selector Lever
Gear Ranges
P (Park)
P (Park) supplements the parking brake by locking the
transmission. The engine can be started in this range.
Never use Park position on an automatic transmission as a substitute for the parking brake. Always
apply parking brake fully when parked to guard
against vehicle movement and possible injury or
damage.
5
204
STARTING AND OPERATING
The following indicators should be used to ensure that
you have engaged the selector lever into the P (Park)
position:
• When shifting into P (Park) move the lever all the way
forward until it stops, and is fully seated.
• Look at the shift indicator display on the instrument
panel to ensure it is in the P (Park) position.
(Neutral) position while driving except to coast when
the vehicle is in danger of skidding (e.g., on icy roads).
The engine may be started in this range. Use this range
for starting your vehicle if it is moving or being towed.
CAUTION!
CAUTION!
Coasting the vehicle, or driving for any other reason
with selector lever in NEUTRAL can result in transmission damage.
Damage to the shifter could result if the selector
lever is moved out of P (Park) before the ignition is
turned from the LOCK to ON position.
WARNING!
R (Reverse)
Shift into R (Reverse) gear only when the vehicle is
completely stopped.
N (Neutral)
No power is transmitted from the engine to the drive
axle. When the brakes are released, the vehicle can be
moved freely (pushed or towed). Do not engage N
Do not coast in N (Neutral) and never turn off the
ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe
practices that limit your response to changing traffic
or road conditions. You might lose control of the
vehicle and have an accident.
STARTING AND OPERATING
D (Drive)
This range should be used for most city and highway
driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and downshifts and best fuel economy.
The transmission automatically upshifts through fifth
gear. The D (Drive) position provides optimum driving
characteristics under all normal operating conditions.
When frequent transmission shifting occurs when using
the Overdrive range, such as when operating the vehicle
under heavy loading conditions (in hilly terrain, traveling into strong head winds, or while towing heavy
trailers, use the AutoStick威 mode and select the “3”
range.
AutoStick威 Gear selection
The AutoStick威 feature can be selected by pressing the
selector lever to the right or the left with the lever in the
D (Drive) position. The gear currently selected is indicated in the instrument cluster display. Briefly, press the
selector lever in the “D -” direction and the transmission
will shift from the current gear to the next lower gear.
205
Press and hold the selector lever in the “D-” direction and
the transmission will shift from the current gear directly
to the next lowest gear for best acceleration.
NOTE: To avoid overrevving the engine when the
selector lever is moved in “D -” direction, the transmission will not shift to a lower gear if the engine’s revolutions per minute (RPM) limit would be exceeded.
Briefly, press the selector lever in the “D +” direction and
the transmission will shift from the current gear to the
next higher gear.
Press and hold the selector lever in the “D +” direction
and the transmission will shift from the current gear
directly to gear “D.”
5
206
STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
On slippery road surfaces, never downshift in order
to obtain braking action. This could result in drive
wheel slip and reduced vehicle control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not prevent this type of loss of control.
You could lose control of your vehicle and have an
accident.
Delayed Shifts in Cold Temperatures
During cold temperature operation, you may notice
delayed upshifts depending on engine and transmission
temperature as well as vehicle speed. This feature improves warm up time of the engine and transmission to
achieve maximum efficiency.
Temporary Transmission Limp Home Mode
The transmission is monitored for abnormal conditions.
If a condition is detected that could result in transmission
damage, the transmission will engage Limp Home Mode.
If vehicle acceleration worsens, or the transmission no
longer shifts, the transmission is most likely operating in
the Limp Home Mode. In this mode, the transmission
will remain in the current gear until the vehicle is
brought to a stop. After the vehicle has stopped, P (Park),
R (Reverse), and N (Neutral) will continue to operate.
Second gear will operate in the D (Drive) shifter position.
The Malfunction Indicator Light may be illuminated.
A reset feature is available to allow the vehicle to be
driven to a dealer for service. To reset the transmission,
use the following procedure:
1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Move the selector lever to the P (Park) position.
3. Turn off the engine.
4. Wait approximately 10 seconds.
5. Restart the engine.
6. Move the selector lever to the desired range. If the
problem is no longer detected, the transmission will
return to normal operation.
STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we
recommend that you visit a dealer at your earliest
possible convenience. Your dealer has diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could recur.
Have the transmission checked at your authorized dealer
as soon as possible.
If the problem has been momentary, the transmission can
be reset to regain all forward gears.
Permanent Transmission Limp Home Mode
Permanent Limp Home Mode will be activated if the
transmission enters temporary Limp Home Mode three
times. Follow the reset procedure described under “Temporary Transmission Limp Home Mode” in this section.
In Permanent Limp Home Mode, P (Park), R (Reverse),
and N (Neutral) will continue to operate. Second gear
will operate in the D (Drive) shifter position. The malfunction indicator light may illuminate.
207
AUTOSTICK姞
Autostick威 is a driver-interactive transmission that offers
manual gear shifting to provide you with more control of
the vehicle. Autostick威 allows you to maximize engine
braking, eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts,
and improve overall vehicle performance. This system
can also provide you with more control during passing,
city driving, cold slippery conditions, mountain driving,
trailer towing, and many other situations.
Autostick姞 Operation
By placing the selector lever in the D (Drive) position, it
can be moved from side to side. This allows the driver to
select a higher or lower range of gears. Moving the
selector lever to the Left (-) triggers a downshift and to
the Right (+) an upshift. The gear position will display in
the instrument cluster on the transmission range indicator.
NOTE:
• In Autostick威 mode, the transmission will only shift
up and down when the driver manually moves the
selector lever Right (D+) or Left (D-).
5
208
STARTING AND OPERATING
• An UPSHIFT message will appear in the Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) portion of the instrument cluster when using Autostick威. This message
appears in order to alert the driver to upshift to the
next gear. The UPSHIFT message will display while
operating the vehicle at higher engine revolutions-perminute (RPM).
Autostick姞 General Information
You can shift in or out of the Autostick威 mode at any time
without taking your foot off the accelerator pedal. When
you wish to engage Autostick威, simply move the selector
lever to the Right (D+) or Left (D-) while in the D (Drive)
position. The transmission will remain in the current gear
until an upshift or downshift is chosen. When you wish
to disengage Autostick威, hold the selector lever to the
right for at least one second. The transmission will now
operate automatically, shifting between the five available
gears.
• Starting out in second gear is helpful in snowy or icy
conditions.
• You can start out in first or second gear. The system
will ignore attempts to upshift at too low of a vehicle
speed.
• The transmission will automatically downshift to first
gear when coming to a stop.
• Avoid using speed control when Autostick威 is engaged.
• The transmission will not automatically shift up when
maximum engine speed is reached while Autostick威 is
engaged.
• Transmission shifting will be more noticeable when
Autostick威 is engaged.
STARTING AND OPERATING
DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES
Acceleration
Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or other slippery surfaces may cause the rear wheels to pull erratically to the right or left. This phenomenon occurs when
there is a difference in the surface traction under the rear
(driving) wheels.
WARNING!
Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous. Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of
the rear wheels. You could lose control of the vehicle
and possibly have an accident. Accelerate slowly and
carefully whenever there is likely to be poor traction
(ice, snow, wet mud, loose sand, etc.).
209
Traction
When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible for a
wedge of water to build up between the tire and road
surface. This is known as hydroplaning and may cause
partial or complete loss of vehicle control and stopping
ability. To reduce this possibility, the following precautions should be observed:
1. Slow down during rainstorms or when the roads are
slushy.
2. Slow down if road has standing water or puddles.
3. Replace tires when tread wear indicators first become
visible.
4. Keep tires properly inflated.
5. Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and
the vehicle in front to avoid a collision in a sudden stop.
5
210
STARTING AND OPERATING
PARKING BRAKE
The parking brake should always be applied when the
driver is not in the vehicle.
WARNING!
The foot operated parking brake is positioned below the
lower left corner of the instrument panel. To apply the
parking brake, push the parking brake pedal down and
then remove your foot from the pedal. To release the
parking brake, push down on the parking brake pedal
and then release.
Never use Park position on an automatic transmission as a substitute for the parking brake. Always
apply parking brake fully when parked to guard
against vehicle movement and possible injury or
damage.
When parking on a flat surface, place the gear selector in
the P (Park) position first, and then apply the parking
brake.
When parking on a hill, it is important to apply the
parking brake before placing the gear selector in P (Park),
otherwise the load on the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to move the selector out of
park. As an added precaution, turn the front wheels
toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the
curb on an uphill grade.
Parking Brake
The brake light in the instrument cluster will turn on
when the parking brake is applied and the ignition
switch is on.
STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: This light only shows that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
WARNING!
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
children in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for
a number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Don’t leave the keys
in the ignition. A child could operate power
windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
• Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged
before driving: failure to do so can lead to brake
failure, and an accident.
211
BRAKE SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic
brake systems. If either of the two hydraulic
systems loses normal capability, the remaining
system will still function. There will be some
loss of overall braking effectiveness. This may be evident
by increased pedal travel during application, greater
pedal force required to slow or stop, and potential
activation of the Brake Warning Light.
In the event power assist is lost for any reason (for
example, repeated brake applications with the engine off)
the brakes will still function. The effort required to brake
the vehicle will be much greater than that required with
the power system operating.
Anti-Lock Brake System
The Anti-Lock Brake System provides increased vehicle
stability and brake performance under most braking conditions. The system automatically “pumps” the brakes
during severe braking conditions to prevent wheel lock-up.
The electronic brake force distribution (EBD) prevents the
rear wheels from over-braking and provides greater control
of available braking forces applied to the rear axle.
5
212
STARTING AND OPERATING
When the vehicle is driven over 7 mph (11 km/h), you
may also hear a slight clicking sound as well as some
related motor noises. These noises are the system performing its self check cycle to ensure that the ABS system
is working properly. This self check occurs each time the
vehicle is started and accelerated past 7 mph (11 km/h).
WARNING!
• The Anti-Lock Brake System contains sophisticated
electronic equipment that may be susceptible to interference caused by improperly installed or high output
radio transmitting equipment. This interference can
cause possible loss of anti-lock braking capability. Installation of such equipment should be performed by
qualified professionals.
ABS is activated during braking under certain road or
stopping conditions. ABS-inducing conditions can include ice, snow, gravel, bumps, railroad tracks, loose
debris, or panic stops.
• Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish their
You also may experience the following when the brake
system goes into Anti-lock:
• Anti-lock system (ABS) cannot prevent the natural laws
• The ABS motor running (it may continue to run for a
short time after the stop),
• the clicking sound of solenoid valves,
• brake pedal pulsations,
• and a slight drop or fall away of the brake pedal at the
end of the stop.
These are all normal characteristics of ABS.
effectiveness and may lead to an accident. Pumping
makes the stopping distance longer. Just press firmly on
your brake pedal when you need to slow down or stop.
of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase
braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded by
the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the
traction afforded.
• The ABS cannot prevent accidents, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, following another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning. Only a safe,
attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents.
• The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must never
be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner, which
could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of others.
STARTING AND OPERATING
All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and
type and tires must be properly inflated to produce
accurate signals for the computer.
Anti-Lock Brake Light
The ABS light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System. The light will come on when the ignition
switch is turned to the ON position and may stay on for
as long as four seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or comes on while driving, it
indicates that the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system
is not functioning and that service is required. However,
the conventional brake system will continue to operate
normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on.
If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced
as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti-Lock
brakes. If the ABS light does not come on when the
Ignition switch is turned to the ON position, have the
bulb repaired as soon as possible.
If both the Brake Warning Light and the ABS Light
remain on, the Anti-Lock brakes (ABS) and Electronic
213
Brake Force Distribution (EBD) systems are not functioning. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.
POWER STEERING
The standard power steering system will give you good
vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability
in tight spaces. The system will provide mechanical
steering capability if power assist is lost.
If for some reason the power assist is interrupted, it will
still be possible to steer your vehicle. Under these conditions, you will observe a substantial increase in steering
effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds and during
parking maneuvers.
NOTE: Increased noise levels at the end of the steering
wheel travel are considered normal and do not indicate
that there is a problem with the power steering system.
Upon initial start-up in cold weather, the power
steering pump may make noise for a short amount of
time. This is due to the cold, thick fluid in the steering
system. This noise should be considered normal, and
does not in any way damage the steering system.
5
214
STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced power steering
assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others.
Service should be obtained as soon as possible.
CAUTION!
Prolonged operation of the steering system at the
end of the steering wheel travel will increase the
steering fluid temperature and it should be avoided
when possible. Damage to the power steering pump
may occur.
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced electronic
brake control system commonly referred to as ESP. This
system includes the ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System), the
TCS (Traction Control System), the BAS (Brake Assist
System), and the ESP (Electronic Stability Program).
These systems work together to enhance both vehicle
stability and control in various driving conditions.
ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System)
This system aids the driver in maintaining vehicle control
under adverse braking conditions by controlling hydraulic brake pressure. This prevents wheel lock-up to help
avoid skidding on slippery surfaces during braking. For
more information about ABS, refer to “Anti-Lock Brake
System” in Section 5 of this manual.
STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
The ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System) cannot prevent
the natural laws of physics from acting on the
vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by
prevailing road conditions. The ABS cannot prevent
accidents, including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or
hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful
driver can prevent accidents. The capabilities of an
ABS-equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a
reckless or dangerous manner, which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of others.
TCS (Traction Control System)
This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each
driven wheel. If wheel spin is detected, brake pressure is
applied to the slipping wheel(s) and engine power is
reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and stability.
215
BAS (Brake Assist System)
This system complements the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS) by optimizing the vehicle braking capability during emergency braking maneuvers. This system detects
an emergency braking situation by sensing the rate and
amount of brake application and then applies optimum
pressure to the brakes. This can help reduce braking
distances.
Applying the brakes very quickly results in the best BAS
assistance. To receive the benefits of this system, you
must apply continuous brake pedal pressure during the
stopping sequence. Do not reduce brake pedal pressure
unless braking is no longer desired. Once the brake pedal
is released, the BAS is deactivated.
5
216
STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
The BAS (Brake Assist System) cannot prevent the
natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle,
nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions. The BAS cannot prevent accidents, including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or
hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful
driver can prevent accidents. The capabilities of a
BAS-equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a
reckless or dangerous manner, which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of others.
ESP (Electronic Stability Program)
This system enhances directional control and stability of
the vehicle under various driving conditions. The ESP
corrects for oversteering and understeering the vehicle
by applying the brake of the appropriate wheel. Engine
power may also be reduced to assist in counteracting the
condition of oversteer or understeer and help the vehicle
maintain the desired path.
The ESP uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the path
that the driver intends to steer the vehicle and compares
it to the actual path of the vehicle. When the actual path
does not match the intended path, the ESP applies the
brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting
the condition of oversteer or understeer.
• Oversteer - when the vehicle is turning more than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
• Understeer - when the vehicle is turning less than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
The ⬙ESP/TCS Indicator Light,⬙ located in the
instrument cluster, starts to flash as soon as the
tires lose traction and the ESP system becomes
active. The ⬙ESP/TCS Indicator Light⬙ also
flashes when TCS is active. If the ⬙ESP/TCS Indicator
Light⬙ begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on the
accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible. Be sure
to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road
conditions.
STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
The ESP (Electronic Stability Program) cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the
vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by
prevailing road conditions. The ESP cannot prevent
accidents, including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or
hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful
driver can prevent accidents. The capabilities of an
ESP-equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a
reckless or dangerous manner, which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of others.
The ESP system has 3 available operating modes:
ESP On
This is the normal operating mode for the ESP. Whenever the vehicle is started, the ESP system will be in
this mode. This mode should be used for most all
driving situations. The ESP should only be turned off
for specific reasons as noted in the following paragraphs.
217
Partial Off
The “Partial Off” mode is intended for times when a
more spirited driving experience is desired. It is also
intended for driving in deep snow, sand, or gravel.
This mode disables the TCS portion of the ESP and
raises the threshold for ESP activation, which allows
for more wheel spin than what ESP normally allows.
The “ESP OFF” button is located in the switch
panel above the radio. To enter the “Partial
Off” mode, momentarily depress the “ESP
OFF” button and the ⬙ESP/TCS Indicator
Light⬙ will illuminate. To turn the ESP on again, momentarily depress the ⬙ESP OFF⬙ button and the ⬙ESP/TCS
Indicator Light⬙ will turn off.
NOTE: To improve the vehicle’s traction when driving
with snow chains, or when starting-off in deep snow,
sand, or gravel, it may be desirable to switch to the
“Partial Off” mode by momentarily depressing the “ESP
OFF” button. Once the situation requiring “Partial Off”
mode is overcome, turn the ESP on again by momentarily
depressing the “ESP OFF” button. This may be done
while the vehicle is in motion.
5
218
STARTING AND OPERATING
Full Off
This mode is intended for off-highway or off-road use
only and should not be used on any public roadways.
In this mode, all TCS and ESP stability features are
turned off. To enter the “Full Off” mode, depress and
hold the “ESP OFF” button for 5 seconds while the
vehicle is stopped with the engine running. After 5
seconds, a chime will sound, the ⬙ESP/TCS Indicator
Light⬙ will illuminate, and the ⬙ESP OFF⬙ message will
display in the vehicle odometer. Press and release the
trip odometer button located on the instrument cluster
to clear this message. The “ESP OFF” message may
appear in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in Section 4 of this manual. To turn ESP on
again, momentarily depress the ⬙ESP OFF Button.⬙
NOTE: The ⬙ESP OFF,⬙ or “ESP System Deactivated”
message will display and the audible chime will sound
when the gear selector is moved into the PARK position
from any position other than PARK and then moved out
of the PARK position. This will occur when the message
was previously cleared.
WARNING!
In the ESP Full Off mode, the engine torque reduction and stability features are cancelled. Therefore,
the enhanced vehicle stability offered by ESP is
unavailable.
NOTE: When the ESP is switched off a feature of the
system remains active. This feature controls wheel spin
across an axle quite similarly to a limited slip differential.
If one wheel on an axle is spinning faster than the other,
the system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel
and allow more engine torque to be applied to the wheel
that is not spinning. To improve the vehicle’s traction
when driving with tire chains, or when starting-off in
deep snow, sand, or gravel, it may be desirable to switch
to the “Partial Off” mode by momentarily depressing the
“ESP OFF” button.
STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
With the ESP switched off, the enhanced vehicle
stability offered by ESP is unavailable. In an emergency evasive maneuver, the ESP system will not
engage to assist in maintaining stability. The “Full
Off” ESP mode is intended for off-highway or offroad only.
Synchronizing ESP
The malfunction indicator light for the ESP is
combined with BAS indicator. If the power
supply is interrupted (battery disconnected or
discharged), the ESP/BAS malfunction indicator light may illuminate with the engine running. If this
should occur, turn the steering wheel completely to the
left and then to the right. The ESP/BAS malfunction
indicator light should go out. However, if the light
remains on, have the ESP and BAS checked at your
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
219
ESP/BAS Malfunction Indicator Light and
ESP/TCS Indicator Light
The malfunction indicator light for the ESP is
combined with the BAS indicator. The yellow
“ESP/BAS Malfunction Indicator Light” and
the yellow “ESP/TCS Indicator Light” in the
instrument cluster both come on when the ignition
switch is turned to the “ON” position. They should go
out with the engine running.
The system will turn the “ESP/BAS Malfunction Indicator Light” on continuously while the engine running if it
detects a malfunction in either the ESP or the BAS or
both. If the light remains on after several ignition cycles,
and you have driven the vehicle several miles at speeds
greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), and the ESP is synchronized (refer to Synchronizing ESP), see your authorized
dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed
and corrected.
5
220
STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
• ⬙The ⬙ESP/TCS Indicator Light⬙ and the ⬙ESP/BAS
Malfunction Indicator Light⬙ will turn on momentarily
each time the ignition switch is turned ON.
• Each time the ignition is turned ON, the ESP System
will be ON even if it was turned off previously.
• The ESP Control System will make buzzing or clicking
sounds when it is active. This is normal; the sounds
will stop when ESP becomes inactive following the
maneuver that caused the ESP activation.
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
Tire Markings
STARTING AND OPERATING
221
NOTE:
• P (Passenger)-Metric tire sizing is based on U.S. design
standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P” molded
into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
• Temporary Spare tires are high-pressure compact
spares designed for temporary emergency use only.
Tires designed to this standard have the letter “T”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: T145/80D18 103M.
• European Metric tire sizing is based on European
design standards. Tires designed to this standard have
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with
the section width. The letter ⬙P⬙ is absent from this tire
size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H
• High Flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design
standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded
into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
• LT (Light Truck)-Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the
letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
5
222
STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Size Designation:
P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Passenger car tire based on European design standards
LT = Light Truck tire based on U.S. design standards
T = Temporary Spare tire
31 = Overall Diameter in Inches (in)
215 = Section Width in Millimeters (mm)
65 = Aspect Ratio in Percent (%)
—Ratio of section height to section width of tire.
10.5 = Section Width in Inches (in)
R = Construction Code
—⬙R⬙ means Radial Construction.
—⬙D⬙ means Diagonal or Bias Construction.
15 = Rim Diameter in Inches (in)
STARTING AND OPERATING
223
EXAMPLE:
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
—A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry.
H = Speed Symbol
—A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding
to its load index under certain operating conditions.
—The maximum speed corresponding to the Speed Symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions. (i.e. tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions,
and posted speed limits).
Load Identification:
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Absence of any text on sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) Tire
Extra Load (XL) = Extra Load (or Reinforced) Tire
Light Load = Light Load Tire
C,D,E = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load — Maximum Load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry.
Maximum Pressure — Maximum Pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this
tire.
5
224
STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire;
however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires
with white sidewalls will have the full TIN including
date code located on the white sidewall side of the tire.
Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall
tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on
the outboard side then you will find it on the inboard side
of the tire.
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
—This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire
safety standards, and is approved for highway use.
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location. (2 digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size. (2 digits)
ABCD = Code used by tire manufacturer. (1 to 4 digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured. (2 digits)
—03 means the 3rd week.
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured. (2 digits)
—01 means the year 2001.
—Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have 1 number to represent the year in
which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991.
STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Loading and Tire Pressure
225
Tire and Loading Information Placard
Tire Placard Location
NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed
on either the face of the driver’s door or the driver’s side
“B” pillar.
5
Tire and Loading Information
Tire Placard Location
This placard tells you important information about
the:
1) number of people that can be carried in the vehicle
2) the total weight your vehicle can carry
3) the tire size designed for your vehicle
4) the cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear
and spare tires.
226
STARTING AND OPERATING
Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed
the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You
will not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you
adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire
inflation pressures specified on the “Tire and Loading
Information” placard and in the “Vehicle Loading” section of this manual.
NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition,
gross axle weight ratings (GAWR’s) for the front and rear
axles must not be exceeded. For further information on
GAWR’s, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to the
“Vehicle Loading” section of this manual.
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX
lbs.” on the Tire and Loading Information placard. The
combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and
trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed
the weight referenced here.
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX pounds” on
your vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kilograms or XXX pounds.
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if “XXX”
amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb.
passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo
and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (since 5 x 150 = 750,
and 1400 – 750 = 650 lbs.)
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo
being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely
exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity
calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this
STARTING AND OPERATING
227
manual to determine how this reduces the available
cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for
the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle.
NOTE: The following table shows examples on how to
calculate total load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities of your vehicle with varying seating configurations
and number and size of occupants. This table is for
NOTE: For the following example, the combined
weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed 865
lbs. (392 Kg).
5
228
STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading
can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the
recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never
overload them.
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Three primary
areas are affected by improper tire pressure:
229
1. Safety—
WARNING!
• Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
cause accidents.
• Under inflation increases tire flexing and can
result in tire failure.
• Over inflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can cause
damage that result in tire failure.
• Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems. You could lose control of your vehicle.
• Over inflated or under inflated tires can affect
vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in
loss of vehicle control.
• Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle
to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right
or left.
• Always drive with each tire inflated to the recommended cold tire inflation pressure.
5
230
STARTING AND OPERATING
2. Economy—
Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear
patterns to develop across the tire tread. These abnormal
wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for
earlier tire replacement. Under inflation, also increases
tire rolling resistance and results in higher fuel consumption.
3. Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability—
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
Over inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride.
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed either on
the face of the driver’s door or on the driver’s side “B”
pillar.
Some vehicles may have Supplemental Tire Pressure
Information for vehicle loads that are less than the
maximum loaded vehicle condition. These pressure conditions will be found in the “Supplemental Tire Pressure
Information” section of this manual.
Tire Placard Location
The pressure should be checked and adjusted as well as
inspecting for signs of tire wear or visible damage at least
once a month. Use a good quality pocket-type gauge to
check tire pressure. Do not make a visual judgement
when determining proper inflation. Radial tires may look
properly inflated even when they are under inflated.
STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, always reinstall the valve stem cap (if equipped). This
will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the
valve stem, which could damage the valve stem.
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always
“cold tire inflation pressure.” Cold tire inflation pressure
is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not
been driven for at least 3 hours, or driven less than 1 mile
(1 km) after a 3 hour period. The cold tire inflation
pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range
of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with
temperature changes.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per
12° F (7° C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind
when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in
the winter.
231
Example: If garage temperature = 68° F (20° C) and the
outside temperature = 32° F (0° C) then the cold tire
inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa),
which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12° F (7° C) for this
outside temperature condition.
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)
during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure
build up or your tire pressure will be too low.
Tire Pressures for High Speed Operation
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or conditions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high
speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very
important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle
loading may be required for high-speed vehicle operation. Refer to original equipment or an authorized tire
dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loading
and cold tire inflation pressures.
5
232
STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under maximum load is dangerous. The added strain on your
tires could cause them to fail. You could have a
serious accident. Don’t drive a vehicle loaded to the
maximum capacity at continuous speeds above 75
mph (120 km/h).
Radial-Ply Tires
Cuts and punctures in radial tires are repairable only in
the tread area because of sidewall flexing. Consult your
authorized tire dealer for radial tire repairs.
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not
spin your vehicle’s wheels above 35 mph (55 km/h).
Refer to the paragraph on “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in
Section 6 of this manual.
WARNING!
WARNING!
Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires
on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle
poorly. The instability could cause an accident. Always use radial ply tires in sets of four (or 6, in case
of trucks with dual rear wheels). Never combine
them with other types of tires.
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire damage or failure. A tire could explode and injure
someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster
than 30 mph (48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds
continuously when you are stuck, and don’t let
anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter what the
speed.
STARTING AND OPERATING
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires
to help you in determining when your tires should be
replaced.
233
Life of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying
factors including but not limited to:
• Driving style
• Tire pressure
• Distance driven
WARNING!
Tires and spare tire should be replaced after six
years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to
follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure.
You could lose control and have an accident resulting in serious injury or death.
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread
grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth
becomes 1/16 inch (2 mm). When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the tire should be replaced.
Many states have laws requiring tire replacement at this
point.
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little
exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact
with oil, grease, and gasoline.
5
234
STARTING AND OPERATING
Replacement Tires
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for
wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure. The manufacturer strongly recommends that you use tires equivalent to the originals in size, quality and performance
when replacement is needed (refer to the paragraph on
“Tread Wear Indicators”). Refer to the “Tire and Loading
Information” placard for the size designation of your tire.
The service description and load identification will be
found on the original equipment tire. Failure to use
equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the
safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle. We recommend
that you contact your original equipment or an authorized tire dealer with any questions you may have on tire
specifications or capability.
WARNING!
• Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than
that specified for your vehicle. Some combinations of unapproved tires and wheels may change
suspension dimensions and performance characteristics, resulting in changes to steering, handling, and braking of your vehicle. This can cause
unpredictable handling and stress to steering and
suspension components. You could lose control
and have an accident resulting in serious injury or
death. Use only the tire and wheel sizes with load
ratings approved for your vehicle.
• Never use a tire with a smaller load index or
capacity, other than what was originally equipped
on your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load
index could result in tire overloading and failure.
You could lose control and have an accident.
• Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having
adequate speed capability can result in sudden
tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size
may result in false speedometer and odometer readings.
Alignment And Balance
Poor suspension alignment may result in:
• Fast tire wear.
• Uneven tire wear, such as feathering and one-sided
wear.
• Vehicle pull to right or left.
235
Tires may also cause the vehicle to pull to the left or right.
Alignment will not correct this condition. See your dealer
for proper diagnosis.
Improper alignment will not cause vehicle vibration.
Vibration may be a result of tire and wheel out-ofbalance. Proper balancing will reduce vibration and
avoid tire cupping and spotty wear.
TIRE CHAINS
If driving conditions require tire chains for your vehicle,
use only chains that meet SAE type “Class S” specifications. In addition, only install tire chains on 245/45ZR20
size tires. Contact you local dealership or tire dealer for
these size tires.
5
236
STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observe the
following precautions:
• Because of restricted chain clearance between tires
and other suspension components, it is important
that only chains in good condition are used. Broken
chains can cause serious damage. Stop the vehicle
immediately if noise occurs that could indicate chain
breakage. Remove the damaged parts of the chain
before further use.
• Install chains on the rear wheels as tightly as possible and then retighten after driving about 1⁄2 mile
(0.8 km).
• Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
• Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large
bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle.
• Use on Rear Wheels only.
• Do not drive for prolonged period on dry pavement.
• Observe the tire chain manufacturer’s instructions
on the method of installation, operating speed, and
conditions for use. Always use the lower suggested
operating speed of the chain manufacturer if different from the speed recommended by the manufacture.
NOTE: In order to avoid damage to tires, chains, and
your vehicle do not drive for a prolonged period of time
on dry pavement. Observe the tire chain manufacturer’s
instructions on method of installation, operating speed,
and conditions for usage.
Always use the lower suggested operating speed if both
the chain manufacturer and vehicle manufacture suggest
a maximum speed. This notice applies to all chain
traction devices, including link and cable (radial) chains.
SNOW TIRES
Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires
during winter. Standard tires are of the all season type
and satisfy this requirement as indicated by the M+S
designation on the tire sidewall.
If you need snow tires, select tires equivalent in size and
type to the original equipment tires. Use snow tires only
in sets of 4, failure to do so may adversely affect the
safety and handling of your vehicle.
STARTING AND OPERATING
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what
was originally equipped with your vehicle and should
not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph (120
km/h).
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS
Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at
different loads and perform different steering, driving,
and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at
unequal rates, and tend to develop irregular wear patterns.
237
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires.
The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with
aggressive tread designs such as those on all season type
tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain
mud, snow, and wet traction levels, and contribute to a
smooth, quiet ride.
Follow the “Maintenance Schedules” in Section 8 of this
manual for the recommended tire rotation frequency for
your type of driving. Remember, more frequent rotation
is permissible if desired. Also, correct for anything causing rapid or unusual wear prior to performing the tire
rotation.
5
238
STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Rotation — Standard Tires
The suggested rotation method is the “side-to-side” as
shown in the following diagram.
Tire Rotation — All Season Tires
The suggested rotation method for vehicles equipped
with all season tires is the “forward-cross” as shown in
the following diagram.
STARTING AND OPERATING
TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS) — IF
EQUIPPED
• The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) will warn
the driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle
recommended cold placard pressure.
• The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about
1 psi (6.9 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means that
when the outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure will decrease. Tire pressure should always be set
based on cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as
the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven
for at least 3 hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1 km)
after a 3 hour period. The cold tire inflation pressure
must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure
molded into the tire sidewall. Refer to the “Tires –
General Information” in this section for information
on how to properly inflate the vehicle’s tires. The tire
pressure will also increase as the vehicle is driven - this
is normal and there should be no adjustment for this
increased pressure.
239
• The TPM System will warn the driver of a low tire
pressure if the tire pressure falls below the lowpressure warning limit for any reason, including low
temperature effects.
• The TPM System will continue to warn the driver of
low tire pressure as long as the condition exists, and
will not turn off until the tire pressure is at or above
the recommended cold placard pressure. Once the low
tire pressure warning (Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light) illuminates, you must increase the tire
pressure to the recommended cold placard pressure in
order for the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light to
turn off. The system will automatically update and the
Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off
once the system receives the updated tire pressures.
The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 10 minutes
above 15 mph (25 km/h) in order for the TPMS to
receive this information.
5
240
STARTING AND OPERATING
− For example, your vehicle may have a recommended cold (parked for more than 3 hours) placard
pressure of 30 psi (207 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F (20°C) and the measured tire pressure is
27 psi (186 kPa), a temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C)
will decrease the tire pressure to approximately 23
psi (157 kPa). This tire pressure is sufficiently low
enough to turn ON the Tire Pressure Monitoring
Telltale light. Driving the vehicle may cause the tire
pressure to rise to approximately 27 psi (186 kPa),
but the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will
still be ON. In this situation, the Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light will turn OFF only after
the tires are inflated to the vehicle’s recommended
cold placard pressure value.
NOTE: Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire
pressure, and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire
pressure in the tire.
CAUTION!
• The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warning have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system
operation or sensor damage may result when
using replacement equipment that is not of the
same size, type, and/or style. After-market wheels
can cause sensor damage. Do not use tire sealant
from a can, or balance beads if your vehicle is
equipped with a TPMS, as damage to the sensors
may result.
• After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure,
always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will
prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve
stem, which could damage the Tire Pressure
Monitoring Sensor.
STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
• The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care
and maintenance, or to provide warning of a tire
failure or condition.
• The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge
while adjusting your tire pressure.
• Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes
the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
• The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not
reached the level to trigger illumination of the Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale light.
Base System — If Equipped
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless
technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to
241
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each
wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure
readings to the Receiver Module.
NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the
tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle regularly
and to maintain the proper pressure.
The TPMS consists of the following components:
• Receiver Module
• 4 Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors
• Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will
illuminate in the instrument cluster and an audible
chime will sound when tire pressure is low in one
or more of the four active road tires. The audible chime
will sound once every ignition cycle for each condition
that it detects. Should this occur, you should stop as soon
as possible, check the inflation pressure of each tire on
your vehicle, and inflate each tire to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure value. Once the system
5
242
STARTING AND OPERATING
receives the updated tire pressures, the system will
automatically update and the Tire Pressure Monitoring
Telltale Light will turn off. The vehicle may need to be
driven for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph (25 km/h) in
order for the TPMS to receive this information. Low
pressure in the spare tire will not cause the Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light to illuminate or the chime to
sound.
NOTE: The compact spare tire (if so equipped) does not
have a tire pressure monitoring sensor. Therefore, the
TPMS will not monitor the pressure in the compact spare
tire. However, if you install the compact spare tire in
place of a road tire that has a pressure below the
low-pressure warning limit, the Tire Pressure Monitoring
Telltale Light will remain ON and a chime will still sound
each ignition key cycle. Once you repair or replace the
original road tire, and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of
the compact spare, the TPMS will update automatically
and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn
OFF, as long no tire pressure is below the low-pressure
warning limit in any of the four active road tires. The
vehicle may need to be driven for up to 10 minutes above
15 mph (25 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this
information.
Check TPMS Warning
The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on
and off for 60 seconds and an audible chime will sound
when a system fault is detected. The flash cycle will
repeat every ten minutes, without an audible chime, until
the fault condition no longer exists. If the ignition key is
cycled, this sequence will repeat, providing the system
fault still exists.
Premium System — If Equipped
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless
technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each
wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure
readings to the Receiver Module.
NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the
tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle regularly
and to maintain the proper pressure.
STARTING AND OPERATING
The TPMS consists of the following components:
• Receiver Module
• 4 Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors
• 3 Trigger Modules (mounted in three of the four
wheel-wells)
• Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System Messages,
which display in the Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC)
• Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will
illuminate in the instrument cluster and an audible
chime will sound when tire pressure is low in one
or more of the four active road tires. The audible chime
will sound once every ignition cycle for each condition
that it detects. In addition, the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) will display one or more Low
Pressure messages (Left Front, Left Rear, Right Front,
Right Rear) for 3 seconds and a graphic showing the
pressure values of each tire with the low tire pressure
243
values flashing. Should this occur, you should stop as
soon as possible, and inflate the tires with low pressure
(those flashing in the EVIC graphic) to the vehicle’s
recommended cold placard pressure value. Once the
system receives the updated tire pressures, the system
will automatically update, the graphic display in the
EVIC will stop flashing, and the Tire Pressure Monitoring
Telltale Light will turn off. The vehicle may need to be
driven for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph (25 km/h) in
order for the TPMS to receive this information. Low
pressure in the spare tire will not cause the Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light to illuminate or the chime to
sound.
5
244
STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
• You can change the pressure units to display in PSI,
kPA, or BAR. Refer to “Language,” under “Personal
Settings (Customer Programmable Features),” under
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in
Section 4 of this manual for details.
• The compact spare tire (if so equipped) does not have
a tire pressure monitoring sensor. Therefore, the TPMS
will not monitor the pressure in the compact spare tire.
However, if you install the compact spare tire in place
of a road tire that has a pressure below the lowpressure warning limit, the Tire Pressure Monitoring
Telltale Light will remain ON and a chime will still
sound each ignition key cycle. In addition, the EVIC
will still display a low-pressure message and a flashing pressure value in the graphic display. Once you
repair or replace the original road tire, and reinstall it
on the vehicle in place of the compact spare, the TPMS
will update automatically. In addition, the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn OFF, and the
graphic in the EVIC will stop flashing and display a
new pressure value, as long no tire pressure is below
the low-pressure warning limit in any of the four
active road tires. The vehicle may need to be driven for
up to 10 minutes above 15 mph (25 km/h) in order for
the TPMS to receive this information.
Check TPMS Warning
The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on
and off for 60 seconds and an audible chime will sound
when a system fault is detected. The flash cycle will
repeat every ten minutes, without an audible chime, until
the fault condition no longer exists. In addition to the
telltale and chime, the Electronic Vehicle Information
STARTING AND OPERATING
Center (EVIC) will display a ⬙CHECK TPM SYSTEM⬙
message for 3 seconds when a system fault is detected. In
the event that a fault occurs because the system did not
receive a pressure value from one or more Tire Pressure
Monitoring Sensors, the EVIC will display the ⬙CHECK
TPM SYSTEM⬙ message and then display dashes (- -) in
place of the pressure value to indicate which sensor is not
being received.
245
NOTE: You can change the pressure units to display in
PSI, kPA, or BAR. Refer to “Language,” under “Personal
Settings (Customer Programmable Features),” under
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in Section 4 of this manual for details.
If the ignition key is cycled, this sequence will repeat,
providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault
no longer exists, the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light will no longer flash, and the ⬙CHECK TPM SYSTEM⬙ message will no longer display, and a pressure
value will display in place of the dashes.
General Information
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
• This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
5
246
STARTING AND OPERATING
The tire pressure sensors are covered under one of the
following licenses:
United States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . KR5S120123
Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2671-S120123
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
6.1L Engine
The 6.1L engine is designed to meet all
emissions regulations and provide excellent fuel economy and performance when
using high-quality premium unleaded
gasoline with an octane rating of 91 or
higher.
Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to
your engine. However, continued heavy spark knock at
high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is
required.
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard
starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience these
symptoms, try another brand of “premium” gasoline
before considering service for the vehicle.
Over 40 automobile manufacturers around the world
have issued and endorsed consistent gasoline specifications (the World Wide Fuel Charter, WWFC) which
define fuel properties necessary to deliver enhanced
emissions, engine performance, and durability for your
vehicle. The manufacturer recommends the use of gasolines that meet the WWFC specifications if they are
available.
Reformulated Gasoline
Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner
burning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline”.
Reformulated gasolines contain oxygenates, and are specifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and improve air quality.
The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gasolines. Properly blended reformulated gasolines will provide excellent performance and durability of engine and
fuel system components.
STARTING AND OPERATING
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxygenates such as 10% ethanol, MTBE, and ETBE. Oxygenates are required in some areas of the country during the
winter months to reduce carbon monoxide emissions.
Fuels blended with these oxygenates may be used in
your vehicle.
CAUTION!
DO NOT use gasolines containing Methanol or E85
Ethanol. Use of these blends may result in starting
and driveability problems and may damage critical
fuel system components.
Problems that result from using methanol/gasoline or
E85 Ethanol blends are not the responsibility of the
manufacturer. While MTBE is an oxygenate made from
Methanol, it does not have the negative effects of Methanol.
247
MMT In Gasoline
MMT is a manganese containing metallic additive that is
blended into some gasoline to increase the octane number. Gasolines blended with MMT offer no performance
advantage beyond gasolines of the same octane number
without MMT. Gasolines blended with MMT have shown
to reduce spark plug life and reduce emission system
performance in some vehicles. The manufacturer recommends using gasolines without MMT. Since the MMT
content of gasoline may not be indicated on the pump,
you should ask your gasoline retailer if his/her gasoline
contains MMT.
It is even more important to look for gasolines without
MMT in Canada, because MMT can be used at levels
higher than allowed in the United States. MMT is prohibited in Federal and California reformulated gasolines.
Materials Added to Fuel
All gasoline sold in the United States is required to
contain effective detergent additives. Use of additional
detergents or other additives are not needed under
5
248
STARTING AND OPERATING
normal conditions and they would result in additional
cost. Therefore, you should not have to add anything to
the fuel.
Fuel System Cautions
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s
performance:
• The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law.
Using leaded gasoline can impair engine performance,
or damage the emission control system.
• An out-of-tune engine, or certain fuel or ignition
malfunctions, can cause the catalytic converter to
overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or
some light smoke, your engine may be out-of-tune or
malfunctioning and may require immediate service.
Contact your dealer for service assistance.
• The use of fuel additives, which are now being sold as
octane enhancers, are not recommended. Most of these
products contain high concentrations of methanol.
Fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems
resulting from the use of such fuels or additives are not
the responsibility of the manufacturer.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
Carbon Monoxide Warnings
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon
monoxide poisoning:
• Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can kill.
Never run the engine in a closed area, such as a
garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running for an extended period. If the vehicle is
stopped in an open area with the engine running for
STARTING AND OPERATING
more than a short period, adjust the ventilation system
to force fresh, outside air into the vehicle.
• Guard against carbon monoxide with proper maintenance. Have the exhaust system inspected every time
the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal conditions
repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive with all side
windows fully open.
249
ADDING FUEL
Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap)
The gas cap is located behind the fuel filler door on the
left side of the vehicle. Push in on the left side (near the
edge) of the fuel filler door to access the fuel filler cap. If
the gas cap is lost or damaged, be sure the replacement
cap is for use with this vehicle.
• Keep the trunk closed when driving your vehicle to
prevent carbon monoxide and other poisonous exhaust gases from entering the vehicle.
5
Fuel Filler Door
250
STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: When removing the fuel filler cap, lay the cap
tether in the hook, located on the fuel filler cap door
reinforcement.
Gas Cap Tether Hook
CAUTION!
• Damage to the fuel system or emission control
system could result from using an improper fuel
tank filler tube cap (gas cap).
• A poorly fitting gas cap could let impurities into
the fuel system.
• A poorly fitting gas cap may cause the Malfunction Indicator Light to turn on.
• To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top
off” the fuel tank after filling. When the fuel
nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel tank is full.
STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
• Never have any smoking materials lit in or near
the vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the
tank filled.
• Never add fuel to the vehicle when the engine is
running.
• A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a
portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You
could be burned. Always place gas containers on
the ground while filling.
NOTE:
• Tighten the gas cap until you hear a “clicking” sound.
This is an indication that the gas cap is tightened
properly. The Malfunction Indicator Light in the instrument cluster may turn on if the gas cap is not
secured properly. Make sure that the gas cap is tightened each time the vehicle is refueled.
• When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel
tank is full.
251
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel
filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a
“Check Gascap” message will display in the Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). If this occurs, tighten
the fuel filler cap properly and press the odometer reset
button to turn off the message. If the problem continues,
the message will appear the next time the vehicle is
started.
A loose, improperly installed, or damaged fuel filler cap
may also turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL).
Refer to “Onboard Diagnostic System” in Section 7 of this
manual for more information.
5
252
STARTING AND OPERATING
VEHICLE LOADING
The load carrying capacity of your vehicle is shown on
the “Vehicle Certification Label.” This information
should be used for passenger and luggage loading as
indicated.
If the seatbacks are folded for carrying cargo, do not
exceed the specified GVWR and GAWR.
Vehicle Certification Label
Your vehicle has a certification label attached to the rear
of the driver’s door.
The label contains the following information:
• Name of manufacturer
• Month and year of manufacture
• Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
• Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) front
• Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) rear
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
• Type of Vehicle
• Month Day and Hour of Manufacture (MDH)
The bar code allows a computer scanner to read the
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes driver, passengers, and cargo. The total
load must be limited so that you do not exceed the
GVWR.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or
rear GAWR.
WARNING!
Because the front wheels steer the vehicle, it is
important that you do not exceed the maximum front
or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition can
result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose
control of the vehicle and have an accident.
STARTING AND OPERATING
Overloading
The load carrying components (axle, springs, tires,
wheels, etc.) of your vehicle will provide satisfactory
service as long as you do not exceed the GVWR and front
and rear GAWR.
The best way to figure out the total weight of your
vehicle is to weigh it when it is fully loaded and ready for
operation. Weigh it on a commercial scale to insure that it
is not over the GVWR.
Figure out the weight on the front and rear of the vehicle
separately. It is important that you distribute the load
evenly over the front and rear axles.
Overloading can cause potential safety hazards and
shorten useful service life. Heavier axles or suspension
components do not necessarily increase the vehicle’s
GVWR.
Loading
To load your vehicle properly, first figure out its empty
weight, axle by axle and side by side. Store heavier items
down low and be sure you distribute their weight as
evenly as possible. Stow all loose items securely before
253
driving. If weighing the loaded vehicle shows that you
have exceeded either GAWR, but the total load is within
the specified GVWR, you must redistribute the weight.
Improper weight distribution can have an adverse effect
on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way
the brakes operate.
A loaded vehicle is shown in the illustration. Note that
neither the GVWR nor the GAWR capacities have been
exceeded.
5
254
STARTING AND OPERATING
EXAMPLE ONLY
Empty Weight
Load (Including driver, passengers, and cargo)
Total
GAWR
Front
Rear Axle
Axle
2054 lbs
1805 lbs
(932 kg) (819 kg )
271 lbs
579 lbs
(123 kg)
(263 kg)
2325 lbs
2384 lbs
(1055 kg) (1081 kg)
2546 lbs
2708 lbs
(1155 kg) (1228 kg)
NOTE: Refer to the “Vehicle Certification Label” attached to the rear of the driver’s door for your vehicle’s
GVWR and GAWRs. This table is only an example.
TRAILER TOWING
Trailer towing with this vehicle is not recommended.
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND
MOTORHOME, ETC.)
TOWING THIS VEHICLE BEHIND ANOTHER
VEHICLE (Flat towing with all four wheels on the
ground)
Recreational towing for this vehicle is not recommended.
NOTE: If the vehicle requires towing, make sure all
four wheels are off the ground.
GROUND CLEARANCE
CAUTION!
Damage to the front and rear fascias can occur if you
disregard the low ground clearance in the front and
rear of this vehicle. Pay close attention when parking
to avoid running into parking curbs. Exercise caution
when entering or exiting steep driveways or when
pulling off the road onto soft shoulders.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CONTENTS
䡵 Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
▫ Without The Ignition Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
䡵 If Your Engine Overheats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
▫ Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle
(Flat Towing With All Four Wheels On The
Ground) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
䡵 TIREFIT Tire Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
䡵 Jump-Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
䡵 Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
䡵 Towing A Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
▫ Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle
With A Tow Dolly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
6
256
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
HAZARD WARNING FLASHER
The hazard flasher switch is located in the center of the
instrument panel between the center air outlets.
This is an emergency warning system and it should not
be used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your
vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for
other motorists.
When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the
Hazard Warning Flashers will continue to operate even
though the ignition switch is OFF.
NOTE: With extended use, the Hazard Warning Flashers may wear down your battery.
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
In any of the following situations, you can reduce the
potential for overheating by taking the appropriate action.
Hazard Flasher Switch
To engage the Hazard Warning Flashers, depress the
switch on the instrument panel. When the Hazard Warning is activated, all directional turn signals will flash on
and off to warn oncoming traffic of an emergency. Push
the switch a second time to turn off the flashers.
• On the highways — Slow down.
• In city traffic — While stopped, put transmission in
neutral, but do not increase engine idle speed.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down
an impending overheat condition. If your air conditioner
is on, turn it off. The air conditioning system adds heat to
the engine cooling system and turning off the A/C
removes this heat. You can also turn the Temperature
control to maximum heat, the Mode control to floor, and
the fan control to HI. This allows the heater core to act as
a supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat
from the engine cooling system.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage
your vehicle. If temperature gauge reads 240°F
(116°C) or greater pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle
the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until
the pointer drops back into the normal range 200–
230°F (93–110°C). If the pointer remains at 240°F
(116°C) or greater and you hear a chime, turn the
engine off immediately, and call for service.
257
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. You may want to call a service center if your
vehicle overheats. If you decide to look under the
hood yourself, see Section 7, Maintenance, of this
manual. Follow the warnings under the Cooling
System Pressure Cap paragraph.
TIREFIT TIRE REPAIR
Small punctures, particularly those in the tread, can be
sealed with TIREFIT. Foreign objects (e.g., screws or
nails) should not be removed from the tire. TIREFIT can
be used in outside temperatures down to approximately
-4°F (-20°C).
6
258
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
The TIREFIT system is located under an access panel in
the trunk.
TIREFIT contents
1. Air pump hose
TIREFIT Location
2. Power plug and cable
3. Air pump switch
4. Pressure gauge
5. TIREFIT sealant bottle
6. TIREFIT sealant hose
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
• Do not attempt to repair a tire on the side of the vehicle
259
Sealing tire with TIREFIT
1. Turn on the hazard warning flashers.
close to traffic. Pull far enough off the road to avoid the
danger of being hit when operating the jack or repairing
a tire.
• Cuts or punctures larger than approximately 0.16 in. (4
mm), tire damage caused by driving with extremely low
tire pressure or on a flat tire, or a damaged wheel can
pose a hazard while driving. TIREFIT should not be
used in such circumstances. Do not drive the vehicle
under such circumstances. Contact your nearest authorized dealer for assistance.
6
• Take care not to allow the contents of TIREFIT to come
in contact with hair, eyes or clothing. TIREFIT is harmful if inhaled, swallowed, or absorbed through the skin:
It causes skin, eye, and respiratory irritation. Any contact with eyes or skin should be flushed immediately
with plenty of water. If clothing comes in contact with
TIREFIT, change clothing as soon as possible.
• In case of allergic reaction or rash, consult a physician
immediately. Keep TIREFIT out of reach of children. If
swallowed, rinse mouth immediately with plenty of
water and drink plenty of water. Do not induce vomiting! Consult a physician immediately.
• Keep away from open flame or heat source.
Hazard Flasher Switch
2. Move the transmission selector lever to the PARK
position, turn off the engine, and set the parking brake.
3. Remove the TIREFIT kit from the trunk.
4. Pull the power plug (2) and the TIREFIT sealant hose
(6) out from the TIREFIT kit.
260
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
5. Unscrew the valve cap from the valve on the deflated
tire.
6. Screw the fitting at the end of TIREFIT sealant hose (6)
coming from the sealant bottle (5) onto the tire valve.
12. Release the parking brake and drive the vehicle back
and forth approximately 30 feet (9.1 m) to distribute the
sealant more evenly within the tire.
13. Turn on the hazard warning flashers.
7. Insert the power plug (2) into the power point on the
instrument panel.
14. Move the transmission selector lever to the PARK
position, turn off the engine, and set the parking brake.
8. Leave the parking brake set and the transmission
selector lever in PARK and start the engine.
15. Disconnect the air pump hose (1) from the underside
of the sealant bottle (5) by flipping the hose valve open.
9. Press the switch (3) on the air pump to I (ON). The air
pump should start to inflate the tire and the tire sealant
(white fluid) will flow from the sealant bottle (5) through
the TIREFIT sealant hose (6) and into the tire.
16. Connect the air pump hose valve to the tire valve and
flip the hose valve closed.
10. Allow the air pump to run for five minutes and then
read the pressure gauge (4). If the tire inflates to 26 psi
(1.8 bar) or greater, proceed to Step 19 of this procedure.
If not, proceed to the following step.
11. Press the air pump switch (3) to 0 (OFF). Then,
disconnect the TIREFIT system from the tire and place it
back in the vehicle.
17. Leave the parking brake set and the transmission
selector lever in PARK and start the engine.
18. Press the switch (3) on the air pump to I (ON). The air
pump should inflate the tire to at least 26 psi (1.8 bar)
within five minutes. If the tire inflates to this level,
proceed to the following step. NOTE: If a tire pressure of
26 psi (1.8 bar) is not obtained within five minutes, the
tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to drive the
vehicle further. Call for assistance.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
19. With a tire pressure of no less than 26 psi (1.8 bar)
press the air pump switch (3) to 0 (OFF) and turn off the
engine. Then, disconnect the TIREFIT system from the
tire and place it back in the vehicle.
20. Release the parking brake and drive the vehicle for
approximately 10 minutes to ensure optimum distribution of the tire sealant within the tire.
21. Turn on the hazard warning flashers.
22. Move the transmission selector lever to the PARK
position, turn off the engine, and set the parking brake.
23. Disconnect the air pump hose (1) from the underside
of the sealant bottle (5) by flipping the hose valve open.
24. Connect the air pump hose valve to the tire valve and
flip the hose valve closed.
25. Check the pressure in the tire by reading the pressure
gauge (4). If the pressure is 19 psi (1.3 bar) or greater,
proceed to the following step. NOTE: If the pressure is
less than 19 psi (1.3 bar), the tire is too badly damaged.
Do not attempt to drive the vehicle further. Call for
assistance.
261
26. Leave the parking brake set and the transmission
selector lever in PARK and start the engine.
27. Inflate the tire to the pressure indicated on the tire
pressure label on the driver-side latch pillar by pressing
the switch (3) on the air pump to I (ON) and watching the
pressure gauge. When the tire pressure is set to the
pressure indicated on the tire pressure label, press the air
pump switch (3) to 0 (OFF) and turn off the engine.
28. Disconnect the TIREFIT system from the tire and
reinstall the valve cap.
29. Place the sealant kit back in the trunk of the vehicle.
Replace the sealant bottle at your nearest authorized
MOPAR威 parts dealership.
30. Have the tire inspected at the earliest opportunity at
an authorized dealer or tire service center.
NOTE:
• If a pressure of at least 19 psi (1.3 bar) cannot be
maintained in the tire, the tire is too badly damaged.
Do not attempt to drive the vehicle further. Call for
assistance.
6
262
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
• Do not operate the electric air pump for more than
eight minutes to avoid overheating. The air pump may
be used again once it has cooled down.
• Replace the TIREFIT sealant bottle (5) once every four
years to assure optimum operation of the system.
• If TIREFIT is liquid, clean water and a damp cloth will
remove the material from the vehicle or tire and wheel
components. Once TIREFIT sealing material has dried,
it can easily be peeled off and properly discarded.
• Do not exceed 55 mph (90 km/h) until the tire has
been inspected.
JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURES
WARNING!
• Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever the
•
•
•
•
•
hood is raised. It can start anytime the ignition switch is on.
You can be hurt by the fan.
Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it started.
Vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission cannot
be started this way. Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic
converter and once the engine has started, ignite and
damage the converter and vehicle. If the vehicle has a
discharged battery, booster cables may be used to obtain a
start from another vehicle. This type of start can be dangerous if done improperly, so follow this procedure carefully.
Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution; do not allow
battery fluid to contact eyes, skin, or clothing. Don’t lean
over battery when attaching clamps or allow the clamps to
touch each other. If acid splashes in eyes or on skin, flush
contaminated area immediately with large quantities of
water.
A battery generates hydrogen gas, which is flammable and
explosive. Keep flame or spark away from the vent holes.
Do not use a booster battery or any other booster source
with an output that exceeds 12 volts.
The battery in this vehicle has a vent hose that should not
be disconnected and should only be replaced with a battery
of the same type (vented).
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
NOTE: The battery is stored under an access cover in
the trunk. Remote battery terminals are located in the
engine compartment for jump-starting.
1. Wear eye protection and remove any metal jewelry
such as watchbands or bracelets that might make an
inadvertent electrical contact.
2. When boost is provided by a battery in another
vehicle, park that vehicle within booster cable reach, but
do not allow the vehicles to touch one another.
5. Connect one end of the jumper cable to the remote
jump-start positive battery post (+) in the engine compartment. Connect the other end of the same cable to the
positive terminal of the booster battery. Refer to the
following illustration for jump-starting connections.
6. Connect the other cable, first to the negative terminal
of the booster battery and then to the engine ground (-)
of the vehicle with the discharged battery. Make sure
you have a good contact on the engine ground. Refer to
the following illustration for jump-starting connections.
6
WARNING!
Do not permit vehicles to touch each other as this
could establish a ground connection and personal
injury could result.
3. Set the parking brake, place the automatic transmission in PARK, and turn the ignition switch to the OFF (or
LOCK) position on both vehicles.
4. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electrical loads.
263
Jump-Starting
264
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
• You should not try to start your vehicle by pushing or towing.
• Do not connect the cable to the negative post of
the discharge battery. The resulting electrical
spark could cause the battery to explode.
• During cold weather when temperatures are below freezing point, electrolyte in a discharged
battery may freeze. Do not attempt jump-starting
because the battery could rupture or explode. The
battery temperature must be brought up above
freezing point before attempting jump-start.
7. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster
battery. Let the engine idle a few minutes. Then, start the
engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery.
NOTE: Refer to ⬙Synchronizing ESP⬙ under ⬙Electronic
Brake Control System⬙ in Section 5 of this manual if the
ESP/BAS light (in the instrument cluster) remains on
continuously after starting the engine of the vehicle with
the discharged battery.
8. When removing the jumper cables, reverse the above
sequence exactly. Be careful of the moving belts and fan.
WARNING!
Any procedure other than above could result in:
1. Personal injury caused by electrolyte squirting
out the battery vent;
2. Personal injury or property damage due to battery
explosion;
3. Damage to charging system of booster vehicle or
of immobilized vehicle.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand, or snow, it
can often be moved by a rocking motion. Turn your
steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the
front wheels. Then shift back and forth between Reverse
and Drive. Usually the least accelerator pedal pressure to
maintain the rocking motion without spinning the
wheels is most effective.
NOTE: Turn off the Electronic Stability Program (ESP)
before rocking the vehicle. For details, refer to “Electronic
Stability Program,” or “Traction Control” in this manual.
265
CAUTION!
• When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by moving between “First” and R (Reverse), do not spin the
wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain
damage may result.
• Racing the engine or spinning the wheels too fast
may lead to transmission overheating and failure.
It can also damage the tires. Do not spin the
wheels above 35 mph (55 km/h).
6
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire damage or failure. A tire could explode and injure
someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster
than 35 mph (55 km/h) when you are stuck, and don’t
let anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter what the
speed.
266
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
WITHOUT THE IGNITION KEY
Special care must be taken when the vehicle is towed
with the ignition in the LOCK position. The only approved method of towing without the ignition key is
with a flat bed truck. Proper towing equipment is necessary to prevent damage to the vehicle.
TOWING THIS VEHICLE BEHIND ANOTHER
VEHICLE (Flat towing with all four wheels on the
ground)
Flat towing of vehicles equipped with an automatic
transmission, is only permitted within the following
limitations:
With The Ignition Key
Your vehicle may be towed under the following conditions: The gear selector must be in NEUTRAL, the
distance to be traveled must not exceed 30 miles (48 km),
and the towing speed must not exceed 30 mph (48
km/h). Exceeding these towing limits may cause a transmission geartrain failure. If the transmission is not operative, or if the vehicle is to be towed more than 30 miles
(48 km), the vehicle must be transported using a flat bed
truck.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CAUTION!
• Do not attempt to tow this vehicle from the front
with sling type towing equipment. Damage to the
front fascia will result.
• If the transmission is not operative, or if the
vehicle is to be towed more than 30 miles (48 km),
then the only approved method of towing is with
a flat bed truck. Damage to the transmission may
result.
• Do not tow the vehicle from the rear. Damage to
the rear sheet metal, and fascia will occur.
• Do not push or tow this vehicle with another
vehicle as damage to the bumper fascia and transmission may result.
267
If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters, etc.)
while being towed, the key must be in the ON position,
not the ACCESSORY position. Make certain the transmission remains in NEUTRAL.
TOWING THIS VEHICLE BEHIND ANOTHER
VEHICLE WITH A TOW DOLLY
The manufacture does not recommend that you tow this
vehicle on a tow dolly. Vehicle damage may occur.
6
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 6.1L Engine Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
▫ Engine Air Cleaner Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
䡵 Onboard Diagnostic System — OBD II . . . . . . 272
▫ Fuel Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
▫ Catalytic Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
䡵 Emissions Inspection And Maintenance
Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
▫ Maintenance-Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
䡵 Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
䡵 Dealer Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
䡵 Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
▫ Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
▫ Engine Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
▫ Drive Belts — Check Condition And Tension . . 278
▫ Spark Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
▫ Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
▫ A/C Air Filter — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
▫ Power Steering — Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
▫ Front & Rear Suspension Ball Joints . . . . . . . . 284
▫ Steering Linkage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
▫ Body Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
▫ Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
7
270
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Windshield Washers/Headlight Washers . . . . . 285
▫ Fuses (Rear Power Distribution Center) . . . . . . 302
▫ Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
䡵 Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
▫ Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
䡵 Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
▫ Hoses And Vacuum/Vapor Harnesses . . . . . . . 291
䡵 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
▫ Fuel System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
▫ Low Beam Headlight, High Beam Headlight,
And Park/Turn Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
▫ Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
▫ Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
▫ Front And Rear Wheel Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . 295
▫ Appearance Care And Protection From
Corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
▫ Cleaning The Center Console Cup Holders . . . 299
䡵 Fuses (Power Distribution Centers) . . . . . . . . . 300
▫ Fuses (Front Power Distribution Center) . . . . . 300
▫ Tail/Stop, Tail, Turn Signal Light, And Backup
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
▫ License Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
䡵 Fluids And Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
䡵 Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts . . . . . . 314
▫ Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
▫ Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
271
6.1L ENGINE COMPARTMENT
7
272
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard
diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors
the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic
transmission control systems. When these systems are
operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent
performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emissions well within current government regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system
will turn on the “Malfunction Indicator Light.” It will
also store diagnostic codes and other information to
assist your service technician in making repairs. Although your vehicle will usually be drivable and not
need towing, see your dealer for service as soon as
possible.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the “Malfunction Indicator
Light” on could cause further damage to the emission control system. It could also affect fuel economy
and driveability. The vehicle must be serviced before
any emissions tests can be performed.
If the “Malfunction Indicator Light” is flashing
while the engine is running, severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur. Immediate service is required.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel
filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a
“Check Gascap” message will display in the Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) — if equipped. If this
occurs, tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the
odometer reset button to turn off the message. If the
problem continues, the message will appear the next time
the vehicle is started.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
A loose, improperly installed, or damaged fuel filler cap
may also turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL).
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass
an inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system.
Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.
273
Your vehicle has a simple ignition key actuated test,
which you can use prior to going to the test station. To
check if your vehicle’s OBD system is ready, you must do
the following:
1. Insert your ignition key into the ignition switch.
2. Turn the ignition to the ON position, but do not crank
or start the engine.
For states, which have an I/M (Inspection and
Maintenance) requirement, this check verifies the
following: the MIL (Malfunction Indicator Lamp)
is functioning and is not on when the engine is running,
and that the OBD (On Board Diagnostic) system is ready
for testing.
3. If you crank or start the engine, you will have to start
this test over.
Normally, the OBD system will be ready. The OBD
system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently
serviced, if you recently had a dead battery, or a battery
replacement. If the OBD system should be determined
not ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
5. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will
happen:
4. As soon as you turn your key to the ON position, you
will see your MIL symbol come on as part of a normal
bulb check.
a. The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then
return to being fully illuminated until you turn off
the ignition key or start the engine. This means that
your vehicle’s OBD system is not ready and you
should not proceed to the I/M station.
7
274
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
b. The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully
illuminated until you turn off the ignition key or
start the engine. This means that your vehicle’s OBD
system is ready and you can proceed to the I/M
station.
If your OBD system is not ready, you should see your
authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was
recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement,
you may need to do nothing more than drive your
vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD
system to update. A recheck with the above test routine
may then indicate that the system is now ready.
Regardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD system is
ready or not ready, if the MIL symbol is illuminated
during normal vehicle operation, you should have your
vehicle serviced before going to the I/M station. The I/M
station can fail your vehicle because the MIL symbol is on
with the engine running.
REPLACEMENT PARTS
Use of genuine Mopar威 parts for normal/scheduled
maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to insure the designed performance. Damage or failures
caused by the use of non-Mopar威 parts for maintenance
and repairs will not be covered by the manufacturer’s
warranty.
DEALER SERVICE
Your dealer has the qualified service personnel, special
tools, and equipment to perform all service operations in
an expert manner. Service Manuals are available which
include detailed service information for your vehicle.
Refer to these manuals before attempting any procedure
yourself.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
The pages that follow contain the required maintenance
services determined by the engineers who designed your
vehicle.
Besides the maintenance items for which there are fixed
maintenance intervals, there are other items that should
operate satisfactorily without periodic maintenance.
However, if a malfunction of these items does occur, it
could adversely affect the engine or vehicle performance.
These items should be inspected if a malfunction is
observed or suspected.
275
Engine Oil
Checking Oil Level
To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must
be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at
regular intervals, such as every fuel stop.
The best time to check the engine oil level is about 5
minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off or before
starting the engine after it has sat overnight.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will
improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Maintain
the oil level in the “SAFE” range. Adding 1.0 quart (1.0L)
of oil when the reading is at the bottom of the “SAFE”
range will result in an oil level at the top of the “SAFE”
range on these engines.
7
276
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
• Day or night temperatures are below 32°F (0°C).
• Stop and Go driving.
• Extensive engine idling.
• Driving in dusty conditions.
• Short trips of less than 10 miles (16 km).
• More than 50% of your driving is at sustained high
speeds during hot weather, above 90°F (32°C).
• Trailer towing.
Engine Oil Dipstick
CAUTION!
• Taxi, Police, or delivery service (commercial service).
• Off-Road or desert operation.
Overfilling or underfilling will cause oil aeration or
loss of oil pressure. This could damage your engine.
NOTE: If ANY of these apply to you, then change your
engine oil every 3,000 miles (5 000 km) or 3 months,
whichever comes first, and follow schedule “B” in the
⬙Maintenance Schedules⬙ in this manual.
Change Engine Oil
Road conditions and your kind of driving affect the
interval at which your oil should be changed. Check the
following list to see if any apply to you.
If none of these applies to you, then change your engine
oil at every interval shown on schedule ⬙A⬙ in the
⬙Maintenance Schedules⬙ in this manual.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
277
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change
intervals exceed 6,000 miles (10 000 km) or 6 months,
whichever comes first.
Engine Oil Selection
For best performance and maximum protection under all
types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only
recommends full synthetic engine oils that meet the
American Petroleum Institute (API) categories of SM or
SM/CF, and meet the requirements of DaimlerChrysler
Material Standard MS-10725.
The manufacturer recommends the use of a full synthetic
engine oil, such as Mobil 1威 SAE 0W-40 or equivalent.
Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade)
The proper SAE viscosity grade of engine oil should be
selected based on the following recommendation and be
within the operating temperature shown in the engine oil
viscosity chart.
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended
engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on
engine oil filler cap location, refer to the “Engine Compartment” illustration in this section.
Materials Added to Engine Oil
The manufacturer strongly recommends against the addition of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to
the engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and its
performance may be impaired by supplemental additives.
7
278
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Disposing of Used Engine Oil and Oil Filters
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and
oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters,
indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the
environment. Contact your dealer, service station, or
governmental agency for advice on how and where used
oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in your area.
Engine Oil Filter
The engine oil filter should be replaced at every engine
oil change.
Engine Oil Filter Selection
This manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow type oil
filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The quality
of replacement filters varies considerably. Only high
quality filters should be used to assure most efficient
service. Mopar威 Engine Oil Filters are a high quality oil
filter and are recommended.
Drive Belts — Check Condition and Tension
Belt tension is controlled by means of an automatic
tensioner. Therefore, no belt tension adjustments are
required. However, belt and belt tensioner condition
should be inspected at the specified intervals and replaced if required. Improper belt tension can cause belt
slippage and failure. Low generator belt tension can
cause battery failure.
At the mileage indicated in the maintenance schedule,
inspect belt and belt tensioner condition. Inspect belts for
evidence of cuts, cracks, glazing, or frayed cords and
replaced if there is indication of damage, which could
result in belt failure. Also, check belt routing to make sure
there is no interference between the belts and other
engine components. See your authorized dealer for service.
Spark Plugs
Spark plugs must fire properly to assure engine performance and emission control. New plugs should be installed at the specified mileage. The entire set should be
replaced if there is any malfunction due to a faulty spark
plug. Malfunctioning spark plugs can damage the catalytic converter. For proper type of replacement spark
plugs, refer to the “Vehicle Emission Control Information” label in the engine compartment.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Engine Air Cleaner Filter
For normal driving conditions, inspect and replace the
engine air cleaner filter at the intervals shown on Schedule “A.” For vehicles driven frequently in dusty or under
severe conditions, inspect and replace the engine air
cleaner filter at the intervals shown on Schedule “B.”
WARNING!
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc) can
provide a measure of protection in the case of engine
backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air
cleaner, hoses, etc) unless such removal is necessary
for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is
near the engine compartment before starting the
vehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner,
hoses, etc) removed. Failure to do so can result in
serious personal injury.
279
Fuel Filter
A plugged fuel filter can cause stalling, limit the speed at
which a vehicle can be driven or cause hard starting.
Should an excessive amount of dirt accumulate in the
fuel tank, filter replacement may be necessary. See your
local dealer for service.
Catalytic Converter
The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel
only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the effectiveness of the
catalyst as an emission control device.
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic converter will not require maintenance. However, it is important to keep the engine properly tuned to assure
proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst
damage.
7
280
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
WARNING!
Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition. In
the event of engine malfunction, particularly involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of performance, have your vehicle serviced promptly. Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter and the
vehicle.
A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over
materials that can burn. Such materials might be
grass or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust system. Do not park or operate your vehicle in
areas where your exhaust system can contact anything that can burn.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
engine operation, a scorching odor may indicate severe
and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this should occur,
safely bring the vehicle to a complete stop, shut the
engine off, and allow the vehicle to cool. Thereafter,
obtain service, including a tune-up to manufacturer’s
specifications immediately.
To minimize the possibility of catalyst damage:
• Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition
when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in
motion.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
281
• Do not try to start engine by pushing or towing the
vehicle.
• Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires
disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic
testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough
idling or malfunctioning operating conditions.
Maintenance-Free Battery
The top of the MAINTENANCE-FREE battery is permanently sealed. You will never have to add water, nor is
periodic maintenance required.
NOTE: The battery is stored under an access cover in
the trunk. Remote battery terminals are located in the
engine compartment for jump-starting.
Battery Location
7
282
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
CAUTION!
• Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can
burn or even blind you. Don’t allow battery fluid
to contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Don’t lean
over a battery when attaching clamps. If acid
splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area immediately with large amounts of water.
• Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep
flame or sparks away from the battery. Don’t use
a booster battery or any other booster source with
an output greater than 12 volts. Don’t allow cable
clamps to touch each other.
• Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands
after handling.
• The battery in this vehicle has a vent hose that
should not be disconnected and should only be
replaced with a battery of the same type (vented).
• It is essential when replacing the cables on the
battery that the positive cable is attached to the
positive post and the negative cable is attached to
the negative post. Battery posts are marked positive (+) and negative (-) and identified on the
battery case. Cable clamps should be tight on the
terminal posts and free of corrosion.
• If a “fast charger” is used while battery is in
vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables
before connecting the charger to battery. Do not
use a “fast charger” to provide starting voltage.
Air Conditioner Maintenance
For best possible performance, your air conditioner
should be checked and serviced by an Authorized Dealer
at the start of each warm season. This service should
include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance
test. Drive belt tension should also be checked at this
time.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants
approved by the manufacturer for your air conditioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are
flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other
unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause
the system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer
to Section 3 of the Warranty Information book for
further warranty information.
• The air conditioning system contains refrigerant
under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal
injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant
or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected
should be done by an experienced technician.
283
Refrigerant Recovery and Recycling
R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluorocarbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product. However, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning
service be performed by dealers or other service facilities
using recovery and recycling equipment.
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C System
Sealers, Stop Leak Products, Seal Conditioners, Compressor Oil, and Refrigerants.
A/C Air Filter — If Equipped
The filter is located in the fresh air inlet under the hood,
behind a removable panel in the cowl on the passenger
side of the vehicle, next to the windshield wipers. When
installing a new filter, ensure its proper orientation. To
replace the filter remove the access door in the cowl
screen by pressing the retaining clips. Slide the lid on the
filter adapter forward and down and remove used filter.
Install new filter with arrows pointing in the direction of
airflow, which is toward the rear of the vehicle (text and
arrows on the filter indicate this).
7
284
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” in this manual for
the recommended air conditioning filter replacement
intervals.
Power Steering — Fluid Check
Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined
service interval is not required. The fluid should only be
checked if a leak is suspected, abnormal noises are
apparent, and/or the system is not functioning as anticipated. Coordinate inspection efforts through a certified
DaimlerChrysler Dealership.
WARNING!
Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and
with the engine off to prevent injury from moving
parts and to insure accurate fluid level reading. Do
not overfill. Use only manufacturer’s recommended
power steering fluid.
If necessary, add fluid to restore to the proper indicated
level. With a clean cloth, wipe any spilled fluid from all
surfaces. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in this section for the correct fluid type.
Front & Rear Suspension Ball Joints
The suspension ball joints should be inspected for external leakage or damage when other maintenance is performed.
Steering Linkage
The tie rod end ball joints should be inspected for
external leakage or damage when other maintenance is
performed.
Body Lubrication
Locks and all body pivot points, including seat tracks,
door hinges, trunk hinges, and hood hinges, should be
lubricated periodically to assure quiet, easy operation
and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to the application of any lubricant, the parts concerned should be
wiped clean to remove dust and grit; after lubricating
excess oil and grease should be removed. Particular
attention should also be given to hood latching components to insure proper function. When performing other
underhood services, the hood latch, release mechanism,
and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a
year, preferably in the fall and spring. Apply a small
amount of a high quality lubricant such as Mopar威 Lock
Cylinder Lubricant or equivalent directly into the lock
cylinder.
Windshield Wiper Blades
The rubber edges of the wiper blades and the windshield
should be cleaned periodically with a sponge or soft cloth
and a mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accumulations of salt or road film.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods
may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use
washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt
from a dry windshield.
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from
the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with
petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.
285
Windshield Washers/Headlight Washers
The windshield washer and the headlight washer share
the same fluid reservoir. The fluid reservoir is located in
the front of the engine compartment on the passenger
side of the vehicle. Be sure to check the fluid level in the
reservoir at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with
windshield washer solvent (not radiator antifreeze) and
operate the system for a few seconds to flush out the
residual water.
The fluid reservoir will hold nearly 1 gallon (4 liters) of
washer fluid when the message “Low Washer Fluid”
appears in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC).
WARNING!
Commercially available windshield washer solvents
are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care
must be exercised when filling or working around
the washer solution.
7
286
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Exhaust System
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust
system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the
vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is
damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken,
damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open
seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes
to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition,
inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO) which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing CO, refer
to “Exhaust Gas” in the “Safety Tips” section of this
manual.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cooling System
WARNING!
287
accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently
spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the
face of the condenser.
• When working near the radiator cooling fan, disconnect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition
switch to the OFF position. The fan is temperature
controlled and can start at any time the ignition
switch is in the ON position.
• You or others can be badly burned by hot coolant
or steam from your radiator. If you see or hear
steam coming from under the hood, don’t open
the hood until the radiator has had time to cool.
Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap
when the radiator is hot.
Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for brittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts, and tightness of the connection
at the bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire system for
leaks.
Coolant Checks
Check engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every 12
months (before the onset of freezing weather, where
applicable). If coolant is dirty or rusty in appearance, the
system should be drained, flushed and refilled with fresh
coolant. Check the front of the A/C condenser for any
Cooling System — Drain, Flush, and Refill
The system should be drained, flushed, and refilled at the
intervals shown on the Maintenance Schedule.
With the engine at normal operating temperature (but
not running), check the cooling system pressure cap for
proper vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of
coolant from the radiator drain cock. If the cap is sealing
properly, the engine coolant (antifreeze) will begin to
drain from the coolant recovery bottle. DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE CAP WHEN THE
COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.
If the solution is dirty or contains a considerable amount
of sediment, clean and flush with a reliable cooling
7
288
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
system cleaner. Follow with a thorough rinsing to remove
all deposits and chemicals. Properly dispose of old
antifreeze solution.
Selection of Coolant
Use only the manufacturer’s recommended coolant. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” for the
correct coolant type.
CAUTION!
• Mixing of coolants other than specified HOAT
engine coolants, may result in engine damage and
may decrease corrosion protection. If a non-HOAT
coolant is introduced into the cooling system in an
emergency, it should be replaced with the specified coolant as soon as possible.
• Do not use plain water alone or alcohol-base
engine coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use
additional rust inhibitors or antirust products, as
they may not be compatible with the radiator
engine coolant and may plug the radiator.
• This vehicle has not been designed for use with
Propylene Glycol based coolants. Use of Propylene Glycol based coolants is not recommended.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Adding Coolant
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine
coolant that allows extended maintenance intervals. This
coolant can be used up to 5 Years or 100,000 miles (160
000 km) before replacement. To prevent reducing this
extended maintenance period, it is important that you
use the same coolant throughout the life of your vehicle.
Please review these recommendations for using Hybrid
Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) coolant.
When adding coolant:
• The manufacturer recommends using Mopar威
Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula
HOAT (Hybrid Organic Additive Technology).
• Mix a minimum solution of 50% HOAT engine coolant
and distilled water. Use higher concentrations (not to
exceed 70%) if temperatures below ⫺34°F (⫺37°C) are
anticipated.
289
• Use only high purity water such as distilled or deionized water when mixing the water/engine coolant
solution. The use of lower quality water will reduce
the amount of corrosion protection in the engine
cooling system.
Please note that it is the owner’s responsibility to maintain the proper level of protection against freezing according to the temperatures occurring in the area where
the vehicle is operated.
NOTE: Mixing coolant types will decrease the life of the
engine coolant and will require more frequent coolant
changes.
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of
coolant, and to insure that coolant will return to the
radiator from the coolant recovery bottle.
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any
accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.
7
290
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• The warning words “DO NOT OPEN HOT” on
the cooling system pressure cap are a safety precaution. Never add coolant when the engine is
overheated. Do not loosen or remove the cap to
cool an overheated engine. Heat causes pressure
to build up in the cooling system. To prevent
scalding or injury, do not remove the pressure cap
while the system is hot or under pressure.
• Do not use a pressure cap other than the one
specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or
engine damage may result.
Disposal of Used Coolant
Used ethylene glycol based engine coolant is a regulated
substance requiring proper disposal. Check with your
local authorities to determine the disposal rules for your
community. To prevent ingestion by animals or children,
do not store ethylene glycol based engine coolant in open
containers or allow it to remain in puddles on the
ground. If ingested by a child, contact a physician
immediately. Clean up any ground spills immediately.
Coolant Level
The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for
determining that the coolant level is adequate. With the
engine off and cold, the level of the coolant in the bottle
should be between the ranges indicated on the bottle.
The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is
no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for
coolant freeze point or replacing coolant. Advise your
service attendant of this. As long as the engine operating
temperature is satisfactory, the coolant bottle need only
be checked once a month.
When additional coolant is needed to maintain the
proper level, it should be added to the coolant bottle. Do
not overfill.
Points To Remember
NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles
(kilometers) of operation, you may observe vapor coming
from the front of the engine compartment. This is normally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vaporized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot coolant to
enter the radiator.
If an examination of your engine compartment shows no
evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be
safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
• Do not overfill the coolant recovery bottle.
• Check coolant freeze point in the radiator and in the
coolant recovery bottle. If antifreeze needs to be
added, contents of coolant recovery bottle must also be
protected against freezing.
• If frequent coolant additions are required, or if the
level in the coolant recovery bottle does not drop when
the engine cools, the cooling system should be pressure tested for leaks.
• Maintain coolant concentration at 50% HOAT engine
coolant (minimum) and distilled water for proper
corrosion protection of your engine, which contains
aluminum components.
291
• Make sure that the radiator and coolant recovery
bottle overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
• Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the
condenser clean, also.
• Do not change the thermostat for summer or winter
operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install
ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs may
result in unsatisfactory coolant performance, poor gas
mileage, and increased emissions.
Hoses and Vacuum/Vapor Harnesses
Inspect surfaces of hoses and nylon tubing for evidence
of heat and mechanical damage. Hard or soft spots,
brittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts, abrasions, and excessive swelling indicate deterioration of the rubber.
Pay particular attention to those hoses nearest to high
heat sources such as the exhaust manifold. Inspect hose
routing to be sure hoses do not come in contact with any
heat source or moving component, which may cause heat
damage or mechanical wear.
7
292
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Insure nylon tubing in these areas has not melted or
collapsed.
Inspect all hose connections such as clamps and couplings to make sure they are secure and no leaks are
present.
Brake System
In order to assure brake system performance, all brake
system components should be inspected periodically.
Suggested service intervals can be found in the “Maintenance Schedule” in this manual.
Components should be replaced immediately if there is
any evidence of wear or damage that could cause failure.
WARNING!
Fuel System
The Electronic Fuel Injection high-pressure fuel system’s
hoses and quick connect fittings have unique material
characteristics that provide adequate sealing and resist
attack by deteriorated gasoline.
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and
possibly an accident. Driving with your foot resting
or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally
high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and
possible brake damage. You wouldn’t have your full
braking capacity in an emergency.
You are urged to use only the manufacture specified
hoses with quick connect fittings, or their equivalent in
material and specification, in any fuel system servicing. It
is mandatory to replace any damaged hoses or quick
connect fittings that have been removed during service.
Care should be taken in installing quick connect fittings
to insure they are properly installed and fully connected.
See your authorized dealer for service.
Brake and Power Steering Hoses
When the vehicle is serviced for scheduled maintenance,
inspect surface of hoses and nylon tubing for evidence of
heat and mechanical damage. Hard and brittle rubber,
cracking, tears, cuts, abrasion, and excessive swelling
indicate deterioration of the rubber. Particular attention
should be made to examining those hose surfaces nearest
to high heat sources, such as the exhaust manifold.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
293
Insure nylon tubing in these areas has not melted or
collapsed.
WARNING!
Inspect all hose connections such as clamps and couplings to make sure they are secure and no leaks are
present.
Worn brake hoses can burst and cause brake failure.
You could have an accident. If you see any signs of
cracking, scuffing, or worn spots, have the brake
hoses replaced immediately.
NOTE:
• Often, fluid such as oil, power steering fluid, and
brake fluid are used during assembly plant operations
to facilitate the assembly of hoses to couplings. Therefore, oil wetness at the hose-coupling area is not
necessarily an indication of leakage. Actual dripping
of hot fluid when systems are under pressure (during
vehicle operation), should be noted before a hose is
replaced based on leakage.
• Inspect the brake hoses whenever the brake system is
serviced and at every engine oil change. Inspect hydraulic brake hoses for surface cracking, scuffing, or
worn spots. If there is any evidence of cracking,
scuffing, or worn spots, the hose should be replaced
immediately! Eventual deterioration of the hose can
take place resulting in a possibility of a burst failure.
Master Cylinder - Brake Fluid Level Check
Check the fluid level in the master cylinder immediately
if the brake system warning light indicates system failure.
Check the fluid level in the master cylinder when performing underhood services.
Clean the top of the master cylinder area before removing
the cap. Add fluid to bring the level up to the top of the
“FULL” mark on the side of the master cylinder reservoir.
Overfilling of fluid is not recommended because it may
cause leaking in the system.
Add enough fluid to bring the level up to the requirements described on the brake fluid reservoir. With disc
7
294
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
brakes, fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake
pads wear. However, low fluid level may be caused by a
leak and a checkup may be needed.
Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” for the
correct fluid type.
CAUTION!
Do not allow petroleum base fluid to contaminate
the brake fluid, all brake seal components could be
damaged causing partial or complete brake failure.
Automatic Transmission
WARNING!
• Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts and the
brake fluid catching fire.
• Use of a brake fluid that has a lower initial boiling
point than the recommended MOPAR威 DOT 3
product or a brake fluid that is unidentified as to
FMVSS specification may result in sudden brake
failure during hard prolonged braking. You could
have an accident.
Use only brake fluid that has been in a tightly closed
container to avoid contamination from foreign matter or
moisture.
Fluid Level Check
Regular automatic transmission fluid level checks are not
required. For this reason, the dipstick is omitted.
If you notice fluid loss or gear shift malfunction, have
your authorized dealer check the transmission fluid level.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
• Using a transmission fluid other than the manufacturer’s recommended fluid may cause deterioration in transmission shift quality and/or torque
converter shudder. Using a transmission fluid
other than that recommended by the manufacturer will result in more frequent fluid and filter
changes. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” for the correct fluid type.
• The fluid level is preset at the factory and it does
not require adjustment under normal operating
conditions. If a transmission fluid leak occurs,
visit your authorized dealer immediately. Severe
damage to the transmission may occur. Your authorized dealer has the proper tools to adjust the
fluid level accurately.
Fluid and Filter Changes
Automatic transmission fluid and filter should be
changed as follows:
Normal Usage — No change necessary
295
Severe Usage (fluid and filter) — Refer to Maintenance
Schedule “B”
Severe Usage is defined as:
• Police, taxi, limousine, commercial type operation, or
trailer towing where the vehicle is driven regularly for
more than 45 minutes of continuous operation.
If the transmission is disassembled for any reason, the
fluid and filter should be changed.
Special Additives
Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered
product and its performance may be impaired by supplemental additives. Therefore, do not add any fluid additives to the transmission. The only exception to this
policy is the use of special dyes to aid in detecting fluid
leaks. In addition, avoid using transmission sealers as
they may adversely affect seals.
Front and Rear Wheel Bearings
Front and rear wheel bearings are permanently sealed.
No regular maintenance is required for these components.
7
296
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Appearance Care and Protection from Corrosion
• Stone and gravel impact.
Protection of Body and Paint from Corrosion
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geographic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads
passable in snow and ice, and chemicals that are sprayed
on trees and road surfaces during other seasons, are
highly corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside
parking, which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants, road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated,
extreme hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and
underbody protection.
• Insects, tree sap, and tar.
The following maintenance recommendations will enable
you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion
resistance built into your vehicle.
What Causes Corrosion?
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of
paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.
The most common causes are:
• Road salt, dirt, and moisture accumulation.
• Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
• Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
Washing
• Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your vehicle in the shade using Mopar威 Car Wash or a mild
car wash soap, and rinse the panels completely with
clear water.
• If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumulated on your vehicle, use Mopar威 Super Kleen Bug
and Tar Remover to remove.
• Use Mopar威 Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains
and to protect your paint finish. Take care never to
scratch the paint.
• Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing
that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint
finish.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials
such as steel wool or scouring powder, which will
scratch metal and painted surfaces.
Special Care
• If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive
near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once
a month.
• It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges
of the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be kept clear
and open.
• If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint,
touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is
considered the responsibility of the owner.
• If your vehicle is damaged due to an accident or
similar cause, which destroys the paint and protective
coating, have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible. The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner.
297
• If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers,
de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well
packaged and sealed.
• If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider
mud or stone shields behind each wheel.
• Use Mopar威 touch up paint or equivalent on scratches
as soon as possible. Your dealer has touch up paint to
match the color of your vehicle.
Wheel and Wheel Trim Care
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and
chrome plated wheels should be cleaned regularly with a
mild soap and water to prevent corrosion. To remove
heavy soil and/or excessive brake dust, use Mopar威
Wheel Cleaner (05066247AB) or equivalent or select a
nonabrasive, non-acidic cleaner. Do not use scouring
pads, steel wool, a bristle brush, or metal polishes. Only
Mopar威or equivalent is recommended. Do not use oven
cleaner. Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic
solutions or harsh brushes that may damage the wheels’
protective finish.
7
298
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Interior Care
Use Mopar威 Fabric Cleaner or equivalent to clean fabric
upholstery and Mopar威 Carpet Cleaner for carpeting.
Interior Trim should be cleaned starting with a damp
cloth, or Mopar威 Satin Select. Do not use harsh cleaners
or Armorall. Use Mopar威 Total Clean to clean vinyl
upholstery.
Mopar威 Total Clean is specifically recommended for
leather upholstery.
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular
cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt
can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery
and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth.
Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth
and Mopar威 Total Clean or equivalent. Care should be
taken to avoid soaking your leather upholstery with any
liquid. Please do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids,
solvents, detergents, or ammonia-based cleaners to clean
your leather upholstery. Application of a leather conditioner is not required to maintain the original condition.
WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in
closed areas they may cause respiratory harm.
Cleaning Headlights
Your vehicle has plastic headlights that are lighter and
less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore
different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and
reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To
remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution followed by rinsing.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel
wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses.
Glass Surfaces
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis
with Mopar威 Glass Cleaner or any commercial
household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
cleaner. Use caution when cleaning the inside rear window equipped with electric defrosters or the right rear
quarter window equipped with the radio antenna. Do
not use scrapers or other sharp instruments, which may
scratch the elements.
When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the
towel or rag that you are using. Do not spray cleaner
directly on the mirror.
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
1. Clean with a wet soft rag or micro-fiber towel. A mild
soap solution may be used, but do not use high alcohol
content or abrasive cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean
with a clean damp rag.
2. Dry with a soft tissue.
299
Seat Belt Maintenance
Do not bleach, dye, or clean the belts with chemical
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric.
Sun damage can also weaken the fabric.
If the belts need cleaning, use Mopar威 Total Clean, a mild
soap solution, or lukewarm water. Do not remove the
belts from the vehicle to wash them.
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the
buckles do not work properly.
Cleaning the Center Console Cup Holders
Clean with a damp cloth or towel using a mild detergent
with the cup holder in the center console.
NOTE: The cup holder cannot be removed.
7
300
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
FUSES (POWER DISTRIBUTION CENTERS)
Cavity
Fuses (Front Power Distribution Center)
A power distribution center is located in the engine
compartment. This center contains fuses and relays.
1
Cartridge
Fuse
—
2
—
3
—
4
—
5
—
6
—
7
—
8
—
9
—
Front Power Distribution Center
Mini
Fuse
20 Amp
Yellow
20 Amp
Yellow
Description
Left High Intensity Discharge (HID) Headlight
Right High Intensity
Discharge (HID) Headlight
15 Amp Adjustable Pedals - if
Blue
equipped
20 Amp AC Clutch/Horn
Yellow
20 Amp Headlight Washer - If
Yellow Equipped
15 Amp Front Control Module
Blue
(FCM)
20 Amp Fog Lights
Yellow
15 Amp Lights – License, Park,
Blue
Side Marker, Stop, Turn
15 Amp Front Control Module
Blue
(FCM)
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
Cartridge
Fuse
—
Mini
Fuse
5 Amp
Orange
25 Amp
Clear
Description
Powertrain Control
Module (PCM)/Starter
—
Auto Shutdown/
Powertrain Control
Module (PCM)
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
25 Amp Powertrain Control
Clear
Module (PCM)
—
20 Amp Injectors, Ignition Coils
yellow
—
—
—
30 Amp —
Anti-lock Brakes System
Pink
(ABS) Valves/
Powertrain Control
Module (PCM)
30 Amp —
Windshield Wiper/
Pink
Washer
Cavity
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
Cartridge
Fuse
50 Amp
Red
20 Amp
Blue
50 Amp
Red
40 Amp
Green
50 Amp
Red
60 Amp
Yellow
30 Amp
Pink
—
30 Amp
Pink
301
Mini
Fuse
Description
—
Radiator Fan
—
Starter
—
Anti-lock Brakes System
(ABS) Pump Motor
AC Clutch/Radiator Fan
High — Low
High Intensity Lighting
(HID)
Radiator Fan
—
—
—
—
—
—
Front Control Module
(FCM)
—
Front Control Module
(FCM)
7
302
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
• When installing the Power Distribution Center
cover, it is important to ensure the cover is properly positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so
may allow water to get into the Power Distribution Center, and possibly result in an electrical
system failure.
• When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to
use only a fuse having the correct amperage
rating. The use of a fuse with a rating other than
indicated may result in a dangerous electrical
system overload. If a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it indicates a problem in the circuit
that must be corrected.
Fuses (Rear Power Distribution Center)
There is also a power distribution center located in the
trunk under the spare tire access panel. This center
contains fuses and relays.
Rear Power Distribution Center
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
6
Cartridge
Fuse
60 Amp
Yellow
40 Amp
Green
—
40 Amp
Green
40 Amp
Green
—
7
—
8
—
9
—
10
11 *
—
—
1
2
3
4
5
Mini
Fuse
Description
Cavity
—
Ignition Off Draw (IOD)
—
Battery
12 *
13 *
14
Cartridge
Fuse
—
—
—
—
—
—
Battery
15
16
17
—
—
—
18
—
19
—
20
21
22
23
24
25
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Heated Seats - if
equipped
20 Amp Fuel Pump
Yellow
20 Amp Amplifier — Subwoofer
Yellow
15 Amp Ignition Switch/Airbag
Blue
Control Module (ACM)
20 Amp Console Power Outlet
Yellow
—
—
—
—
Mini
Fuse
303
Description
—
—
10 Amp
Red
—
—
AC Heater Control/
Cluster/Sentry Key Remote Keyless Entry
—
—
—
—
20 Amp Cluster
Yellow
20 Amp Selectable Power Outlet
Yellow
10 Amp Stop Lights
Red
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
7
304
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
26
27
Cartridge
Fuse
—
—
28
—
29
—
30
—
31
32
33
34
—
—
—
—
Mini
Fuse
—
10 Amp
Red
10 Amp
Red
5 Amp
Orange
Description
—
Airbag/Airbag Control
Module (ACM)
Curtain Airbag - if
equipped
Anti-lock Brakes
Module/Cluster/Front
Control Module (FCM)/
Powertrain Control
Module (PCM)/Sentry
Key Remote Keyless
Entry/Stop Lights
10 Amp Door Modules/Power
Red
Mirrors - if equipped/
Steering Control Module
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Cavity
35
Cartridge
Fuse
—
36
—
37
—
38
—
Mini
Fuse
5 Amp
Orange
Description
Amplifier - if equipped/
Antenna/Ignition
Delay/Overhead
Console/Passenger Door
Lock & Express Power
Window Switch - if
equipped/Power Mirrors - if equipped/Rain
Sensor - if equipped/
Rear Defrost
20 Amp Hands Free Phone - if
Yellow equipped/Media System
Monitor DVD - if
equipped/Radio/
Satellite Receiver - if
equipped
15 Amp Transmission - NAG1
Blue
5 Amp Analog Clock/Cargo
Orange Light/Overhead Console
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
39
40
41
42
43
44
Cartridge
Fuse
—
Mini
Fuse
10 Amp
Red
10 Amp
Red
Description
Heated Mirrors - if
equipped
—
Heated Seats - if
equipped/Inside Rearview Mirror
—
10 Amp AC Heater Control/Park
Red
Assist - if equipped/Tire
Pressure Monitoring - if
equipped
30 Amp —
Front Blower Motor
Pink
30 Amp —
Amplifier - if equipped/
Pink
Antenna/Rear Defrost
20 Amp —
Amplifier - if equipped/
Blue
Front Control Module
(FCM)/Sunroof - if
equipped
305
* Cavities 11, 12, and 13 contain self-resetting fuses
(circuit breakers) that are only serviceable by an authorized dealer. The Cluster (without power memory seat),
the Driver Seat Switch (with power memory seat), and
the Memory Module (if equipped) are fused by the 25
amp circuit breaker in Cavity 11. The Passenger Seat
Switch is fused by the 25 amp circuit breaker in Cavity 12.
The Door Modules (except base), the Driver Door Lock
Switch (base), the Driver Express Power Window Switch
(if equipped), and the Passenger Door Lock Switch (base)
are fused by the 25 amp circuit breaker in Cavity 13. If
you experience temporary or permanent loss of these
systems, see your authorized dealer for service.
7
306
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
• When installing the Power Distribution Center
cover, it is important to ensure the cover is properly positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so
may allow water to get into the Power Distribution Center, and possibly result in an electrical
system failure.
• When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to
use only a fuse having the correct amperage
rating. The use of a fuse with a rating other than
indicated may result in a dangerous electrical
system overload. If a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it indicates a problem in the circuit
that must be corrected.
VEHICLE STORAGE
If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for more than 21
days, you may want to take steps to protect your battery.
You may:
• Disconnect the negative cable from the battery.
• Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of
service (i.e. vacation) for two weeks or more, run the
air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes
in the fresh air and high blower setting. This will
insure adequate system lubrication to minimize the
possibility of compressor damage when the system is
started again.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
REPLACEMENT BULBS
LIGHT BULBS — Interior
Bulb Number
Rear Courtesy/Reading Lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . W5W
Rear Compartment (Trunk) Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . 579
Overhead Console Reading Lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . 578
Visor Vanity Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A6220
Glove Box Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Door Courtesy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 562
Shift Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . JKLE14140
307
Front Fog Light. . . . . . . . 9145/H10 (Serviced at Dealer)
Front Side Marker . . . . . . . . W5W (Serviced at Dealer)
Tail/Stop Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3057
Tail Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3057
Turn Signal Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3057
Backup Light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3057
Center High Mount Stop Light (CHMSL) . . . . . . . LED
License . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . W5W
BULB REPLACEMENT
NOTE: For lighted switches, see your dealer for replacement instructions.
Low Beam Headlight, High Beam Headlight, and
Park/Turn Light
All of the interior bulbs are glass wedge base or glass
cartridge types. Aluminum base bulbs are not approved
and should not be used for replacement.
High Intensity Discharge Headlights (HID)
The headlights are a type of high voltage discharge tube.
High voltage can remain in the circuit even with the
headlight switch off and the key removed. Because of
this, you should not attempt to service a headlight bulb
yourself. If a headlight bulb fails, take your vehicle to
an authorized dealer for service.
LIGHT BULBS — Exterior
Bulb Number
Low Beam Headlight – High
Intensity Discharge (HID) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D1S
(Serviced at Dealer)
High Beam Headlight. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9005
Front Park/Turn Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3157AK
7
308
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
A transient high tension occurs at the bulb sockets of
High Intensity Discharge (HID) headlights when the
headlight switch is turned ON. It may cause serious
electrical shock or electrocution if not serviced properly. See your authorized dealer for service.
4. Push the replacement bulb into the socket assembly.
5. Reinstall the bulb and socket assembly into the headlight assembly, and then turn it clockwise.
NOTE: When HID headlights are turned on, there is a
blue hue to the lights. This diminishes and becomes more
white after approximately 10 seconds, as the system
charges.
1. Open the hood.
NOTE: Removal of the air cleaner filter housing may be
necessary prior to replacing bulbs in the headlight assembly on the driver side of the vehicle.
2. Twist the appropriate bulb and socket assembly
counter-clockwise, and then pull it out of the headlight
assembly.
3. Pull the bulb out of the socket assembly.
1 — Low Beam Headlight Bulb
2 — High Beam Headlight Bulb
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
309
Tail/Stop, Tail, Turn Signal Light, and Backup
Light
1. Open the Trunk.
2. Remove two fasteners from the back of the tail light
assembly.
3 — Park/Turn Light Bulb
7
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the
bulb comes in contact with an oily surface, clean the
bulb with rubbing alcohol.
3. Pull back the trunk liner.
4. Remove the remaining fastener from the back of the
tail light assembly.
5. Push the electrical connector locking tab to the side.
310
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
6. Disconnect the electrical connector.
7. Pull the tail light assembly clear from the vehicle to
access the bulbs. Turn bulb sockets counter-clockwise to
remove.
8. Turn the appropriate bulb and socket assembly
counter-clockwise to remove it from the tail light assembly.
1 — Tail/Stop Light Bulb
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
2 — Tail Light Bulb
3 — Turn Signal Light Bulb
311
7
312
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
License Light
1. Remove the screws securing the light to the rear fascia.
2. Remove the bulb and socket assembly.
3. Pull the bulb out of the socket assembly.
4 — Backup Light Bulb
9. Pull the bulb out of the socket assembly.
10. Push the replacement bulb into the socket assembly.
11. Reinstall the bulb and socket assembly into the tail
light assembly, and then turn it clockwise.
12. Reinstall the tail light assembly, fasteners, electrical
connector, and trunk liner.
13. Close the trunk.
1 — License Light Bulb
2 — Socket
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
4. Push the replacement bulb into the socket assembly.
FLUIDS AND CAPACITIES
5. Reinstall the bulb and socket assembly.
6. Reattach the light to the rear fascia, and then install the
screws.
313
Fuel (approximate)
6.1 Liter Engine
U.S.
Metric
19 gallons
72 liters
Engine Oil with Filter
6.1 Liter Engine (SAE 0W-40)
7 qts.
6.6 liters
Cooling System *
6.1 Liter Engine (Mopar威
15.2 qts
14.4 liAntifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/
ters
100,000 Mile Formula) or
equivalent.
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to
MAX level.
7
314
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS, AND GENUINE PARTS
Engine
Component
Engine Coolant
Engine Oil (6.1 Liter)
Oil Filter (6.1 Liter)
Spark Plugs
Fuel Selection (6.1 Liter)
Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts
Mopar威 Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula HOAT (Hybrid Organic Additive Technology) or equivalent
For best performance and maximum protection under all types of operating
conditions, the manufacturer only recommends full synthetic engine oils that
meet the American Petroleum Institute (API) categories of SM or SM/CF, and
meet the requirements of DaimlerChrysler Material Standard MS-10725. The
manufacturer recommends the use of a full synthetic engine oil, such as Mobil 1威 SAE 0W-40 or equivalent. For additional information, refer to the “Engine Oil Selection” and “Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade)” in the “Maintenance Procedures” section of this manual.
Mopar威 05281090 or equivalent.
Refer to the “Vehicle Emission Control Information” label in the engine compartment.
Premium Unleaded 91 Octane Only or higher.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
315
Chassis
Component
Automatic Transmission
Brake Master Cylinder
Power Steering Reservoir
Rear Axle
Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts
Mopar威 ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid.
Mopar威 DOT 3, SAE J1703 should be used. If DOT 3, SAE J1703 brake
fluid is not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable. Use only recommended
brake fluids.
Mopar威 Power Steering Fluid + 4, Mopar威 ATF+4 Automatic Transmission
Fluid.
API Certified GL-5 SAE 75W140 Synthetic Gear Lubricant or equivalent.
7
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
CONTENTS
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
䡵 Emission Control System Maintenance . . . . . . 318
▫ Schedule “B” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
䡵 Maintenance Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
▫ Schedule “A” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331 C
S
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
318
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
The “Scheduled” maintenance services, listed in bold
type must be done at the times or mileages specified to
assure the continued proper functioning of the emission
control system. These, and all other maintenance services
included in this manual, should be done to provide best
vehicle performance and reliability. More frequent mainS tenance may be needed for vehicles in severe operating
C conditions such as dusty areas and very short trip
H driving.
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
Inspection and service also should be done any time a
malfunction is suspected.
NOTE: Maintenance, replacement, or repair of the
emission control devices and systems on your vehicle
may be performed by any automotive repair establishment or individual using any automotive part, which has
been certified pursuant to U.S. EPA or, in the State of
California, California Air Resources Board regulations.
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
There are two maintenance schedules that show the
required service for your vehicle.
First is Schedule “B.” It is for vehicles that are operated
under the conditions that are listed below and at the
beginning of the schedule.
Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter every
60,000 miles (100 000 km) if the vehicle is usually
operated under one or more of the conditions marked
with an 〫.
• Day or night temperatures are below 32°F (0°C).
• Stop and go driving.
• Extensive engine idling.
• Driving in dusty conditions.
• Short trips of less than 10 miles (16 km).
• More than 50% of your driving is at sustained high
speeds during hot weather, above 90°F (32°C).
• Trailer towing.〫
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
• Taxi, police, or delivery service (commercial service).〫
• Off-road or desert operation.
NOTE: If ANY of these apply to you, then change your
engine oil every 3,000 miles (5 000 km) or 3 months,
whichever comes first, and follow the maintenance recommendations in Schedule “B” in this section.
NOTE: If ANY of these apply to you, then flush and
replace the engine coolant every 102,000 miles (170 000
km) or 60 months, whichever comes first, and follow the
maintenance recommendations in Schedule “B” in this
section.
NOTE: Most vehicles are operated under the conditions
listed for Schedule ⬙B.⬙
Second is Schedule “A.” It is for vehicles that are not
operated under any of the conditions listed under Schedule ⬙B.⬙
Use the schedule that best describes your driving conditions. Where time and mileage are listed, follow the
interval that occurs first.
319 M
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change
intervals exceed 6,000 miles (10 000 km) or 6 months
whichever comes first.
CAUTION!
Failure to perform the required maintenance items
may result in damage to the vehicle.
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
At Each Stop for Fuel
D
• Check the engine oil level about 5 minutes after a fully UL
warmed engine is shut off. Checking the oil level while E
the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accu- S
racy of the oil level reading. Add oil only when the
level is at or below the ADD or MIN mark.
• Check the windshield washer solvent and add if
required.
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
320
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
Once a Month
At Each Oil Change
• Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or
damage.
• Change the engine oil filter.
• Inspect the battery, and clean, and tighten the terminals as required.
• Check the fluid levels of coolant reservoir and brake
master cylinder, and add as needed.
• Check all lights and all other electrical items for correct
operation.
• Check rubber seals on each side of the radiator for
proper fit.
• Inspect the exhaust system.
• Inspect the brake hoses.
• Inspect the CV joints and front and rear suspension
components.
• Check the coolant level, hoses, and clamps.
SCHEDULE “B”
SCHEDULE “B”
Follow Schedule “B” if you usually operate your vehicle
under one or more of the following conditions.
Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter every
60,000 miles (100 000 km) if the vehicle is usually
operated under one or more of the conditions marked
with an 〫.
• Day or night temperatures are below 32°F (0°C).
• Stop and go driving.
• Extensive engine idling.
• Driving in dusty conditions.
• Short trips of less than 10 miles (16 km).
• More than 50% of your driving is at sustained high
speeds during hot weather, above 90°F (32°C).
321 M
A
I
N
• Taxi, police or delivery service (commercial ser- T
E
vices).〫
N
A
• Off-road or desert operation.
N
C
NOTE: If ANY of these apply to you, then change your E
• Trailer towing.〫
engine oil every 3,000 miles (5 000 km) or 3 months,
whichever comes first, and follow the maintenance rec- S
C
ommendations in Schedule “B” in this section.
H
NOTE: If ANY of these apply to you, then flush and
replace the engine coolant every 102,000 miles (170 000
km) or 60 months, whichever comes first, and follow the
maintenance recommendations in Schedule “B” in this
section.
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M 322 SCHEDULE “B”
A
I
N Miles
T (Kilometers)
E
N Change engine oil and engine oil filter, if not
A replaced at 3 months.
N
C Inspect the air cleaner filter and replace if reE quired.*
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
Replace the air cleaner filter.
Inspect the front and rear brake linings and
rotors.
Replace the air conditioning filter.
Rotate the tires.
3,000
(5 000)
X
6,000
(10 000)
X
9,000
(15 000)
X
12,000
(20 000)
X
X
X
X
X
15,000
(25 000)
X
18,000
(30 000)
X
X
X*
X
X
X
X
X
SCHEDULE “B”
Miles
(Kilometers)
Change engine oil and engine oil filter, if not
replaced at 3 months.
Inspect the air cleaner filter and replace if required.*
Replace the air cleaner filter.
Inspect the front and rear brake linings and
rotors.
Check and replace, if necessary, the PCV
valve. *
Replace the air conditioning filter.
Rotate the tires.
21,000
(35 000)
X
24,000
(40 000)
X
27,000
(45 000)
X
X
X
X
30,000
(50 000)
X
33,000
(55 000)
X
36,000
(60 000)
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
323 M
X
X
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M 324 SCHEDULE “B”
A
I
N Miles
T (Kilometers)
E
N Change engine oil and engine oil filter, if not
A replaced at 3 months.
N
C Inspect the air cleaner filter and replace if reE quired.*
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
Replace the air cleaner filter.
Inspect the front and rear brake linings and
rotors.
Change the rear axle fluid.
Replace the air conditioning filter.
Rotate the tires.
39,000
(65 000)
X
42,000
(70 000)
X
X
X
45,000
(75 000)
X
48,000
(80 000)
X
51,000
(85 000)
X
54,000
(90 000)
X
X
X
X
X*
X
X
X
X
X
X
SCHEDULE “B”
Miles
(Kilometers)
Change engine oil and engine oil filter, if not
replaced at 3 months.
Inspect the air cleaner filter and replace if required.*
Replace the air cleaner filter.
Inspect the front and rear brake linings and
rotors.
Check and Inspect the accessory drive belt
and tensioner. Replace if required.
Check and replace, if necessary, the PCV
valve. * ‡
Change the power steering fluid
Change the automatic transmission fluid and
filter.
Replace the air conditioning filter.
Flush and replace engine coolant at 60 months
if not done at 102,000 miles.
Rotate the tires.
57,000
(95 000)
X
60,000
63,000
66,000
69,000
(100 000) (105 000) (110 000) (115 000)
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
72,000
(120 000)
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
X
X
X
325 M
X
X
X
M 326 SCHEDULE “B”
A
I
N Miles
T (Kilometers)
E
N Change engine oil and engine oil filter, if not
A replaced at 3 months.
N
C Inspect the air cleaner filter and replace if reE quired.*
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
Replace the air cleaner filter.
Inspect the front and rear brake linings and
rotors.
Check and replace, if necessary, the PCV
valve. * ‡
Replace the air conditioning filter.
Rotate the tires.
75,000
78,000
81,000
84,000
87,000
(125 000) (130 000) (135 000) (140 000) (145 000)
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X*
90,000
(150 000)
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
SCHEDULE “B”
Miles
(Kilometers)
Change engine oil and engine oil filter, if not replaced at 3 months.
Inspect the air cleaner filter and replace if required.*
Replace the air cleaner filter.
Inspect the front and rear brake linings and rotors.
Replace the spark plugs.
Check and Inspect the accessory drive belt and tensioner. Replace if required.
Change the rear axle fluid.
Replace the air conditioning filter.
Flush and replace engine coolant at 102,000 miles if
not done at 60 months.
Rotate the tires.
93,000
(155 000)
X
96,000
(160 000)
X
99,000
(165 000)
X
102,000
(170 000)
X
X
X
X
X
105,000
(175 000)
X
X*
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
X
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
X
8
X
X
X
X
X
327 M
X
M 328 SCHEDULE “B”
A
I
N Miles
T (Kilometers)
E
N Change engine oil and engine oil filter, if not reA placed at 3 months.
N
C Inspect the air cleaner filter and replace if reE quired.*
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
Replace the air cleaner filter.
Inspect the front and rear brake linings and rotors.
Check and replace, if necessary, the PCV valve. *
Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter.
Replace the air conditioning filter.
Flush and replace the engine coolant at 120 months,
if not replaced at 102,000 miles.
Rotate the tires.
108,000
(180 000)
X
111,000
(185 000)
X
114,000
(190 000)
X
117,000
(195 000)
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
120,000
(200 000)
X
X
X
SCHEDULE “B”
Miles
(Kilometers)
Change engine oil and engine oil filter, if not replaced at 3 months.
Inspect the air cleaner filter and replace if required.*
Replace the air cleaner filter.
Inspect the front and rear brake linings and rotors.
Check and Inspect the accessory drive belt and tensioner. Replace if required.
Replace the air conditioning filter.
Rotate the tires.
123,000
(205 000)
X
126,000
(210 000)
X
129,000
(215 000)
X
132,000
(220 000)
X
X
X
X
X
135,000
(225 000)
X
X*
X
X
X
X
X
329 M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M 330 SCHEDULE “B”
A
I
N Miles
T (Kilometers)
E
N Change engine oil and engine oil filter, if not reA placed at 3 months.
N
C Inspect the air cleaner filter and replace if reE quired.*
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
138,000
(230 000)
X
141,000
(235 000)
X
144,000
(240 000)
X
147,000
(245 000)
X
X
X
X
X
Replace the air cleaner filter.
Inspect the front and rear brake linings and rotors.
Change the rear axle fluid.
Replace the air conditioning filter.
Rotate the tires.
* This maintenance is recommended by the manufacture
to the owner but is not required to maintain the emissions warranty.
‡ This maintenance is not required if previously replaced.
150,000
(250 000)
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Inspection and service should also be performed anytime
a malfunction is observed or suspected. Retain all receipts.
SCHEDULE “A”
331 M
SCHEDULE “A”
Miles
(Kilometers)
[Months]
Change engine oil and engine oil filter.
Inspect the air cleaner filter and replace if required.*
Replace the air cleaner filter.
Inspect the front and rear brake linings and
rotors.
Replace the air conditioning filter.
Rotate the tires.
6,000
(10 000)
[6]
X
X
12,000
(20 000)
[12]
X
X
18,000
(30 000)
[18]
X
X
24,000
(40 000)
[24]
X
X
30,000
(50 000)
[30]
X
36,000
(60 000)
[36]
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M 332 SCHEDULE “A”
A
I
N Miles
T (Kilometers)
E
N [Months]
A Change engine oil and engine oil filter.
N
C Inspect the air cleaner filter and replace if
E required.*
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
Replace the air cleaner filter.
Inspect the front and rear brake linings and
rotors.
Check and Inspect the accessory drive belt
and tensioner. Replace if required.
Flush and replace engine coolant at 60 months
if not done at 102,000 miles.
Check and replace, if necessary, the PCV
valve. *
Replace the air conditioning filter.
Rotate the tires.
42,000
(70 000)
[42]
X
X
48,000
(80 000)
[48]
X
X
54,000
(90 000)
[54]
X
X
60,000
66,000
72,000
(100 000) (110 000) (120 000)
[60]
[66]
[72]
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
SCHEDULE “A”
Miles
(Kilometers)
[Months]
Change engine oil and engine oil filter.
Inspect the air cleaner filter and replace if required.*
Replace the air cleaner filter.
Inspect the front and rear brake linings and rotors.
Check and Inspect the accessory drive belt and tensioner. Replace if required.
Replace the spark plugs.
Check and replace, if necessary, the PCV valve. *‡
Flush and replace the engine coolant at 102,000
miles if not done at 60 months.
Replace the air conditioning filter.
Rotate the tires.
78,000
(130 000)
[78]
X
X
84,000
(140 000)
[84]
X
X
90,000
(150 000)
[90]
X
96,000
(160 000)
[96]
X
X
102,000
(170 000)
[102]
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
333 M
X
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M 334 SCHEDULE “A”
A
I
N Miles
T (Kilometers)
E
N [Months]
A Change engine oil and engine oil filter.
N
C Inspect the air cleaner filter and replace if reE quired.*
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
Replace the air cleaner filter.
Inspect the front and rear brake linings and rotors.
Check and Inspect the accessory drive belt and tensioner. Replace if required.
Check and replace, if necessary, the PCV valve. *
Replace the air conditioning filter.
Flush and replace the engine coolant at 120
months, if not replaced at 102,000 miles.
Rotate the tires.
108,000
(180 000)
[108]
X
X
114,000
(190 000)
[114]
X
X
120,000
(200 000)
[120]
X
126,000
(210 000)
[126]
X
X
132,000
(220 000)
[132]
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
SCHEDULE “A”
Miles
(Kilometers)
[Months]
Change engine oil and engine oil filter.
Inspect the air cleaner filter and replace if required.*
Replace the air cleaner filter.
Inspect the front and rear brake linings and rotors.
Replace the air conditioning filter.
Rotate the tires.
* This maintenance is recommended by the manufacturer
to the owner but is not required to maintain the emissions warranty.
‡ This maintenance is not required if previously replaced.
Inspection and service should also be performed anytime
a malfunction is observed or suspected. Retain all receipts.
138,000
(230 000)
[138]
X
X
144,000
(240 000)
[144]
X
X
X
X
X
X
335 M
150,000
(250 000)
[150]
X
X
X
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
have the knowledge and the right equipment. If you
have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
CONTENTS
䡵 Suggestions For Obtaining Service For Your
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
▫ Prepare For The Appointment . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
▫ Prepare A List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
䡵 Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
▫ In Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
䡵 Publication Order Forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
▫ Be Reasonable With Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
䡵 Department Of Transportation Uniform Tire
Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
䡵 If You Need Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
▫ Treadwear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
䡵 Warranty Information (U.S. Vehicles Only) . . . 340
▫ Traction Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
䡵 Mopar威 Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
▫ Temperature Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
9
338
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE
Prepare For The Appointment
If you’re having warranty work done, be sure to have the
right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All
work to be performed may not be covered by the
warranty, discuss additional charges with the service
manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle’s
service history. This can often provide a clue to the
current problem.
Prepare A List
Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the
specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident,
or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the
service advisor know.
Be Reasonable With Requests
If you list a number of items, and you must have your
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with
the service advisor and list the items in order of priority.
At many dealers you may obtain a rental vehicle at a
minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it is advisable
to make these arrangements when you call for an appointment.
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
The manufacturer and its dealers are vitally interested in
your satisfaction. We want you to be happy with our
products and services.
Warranty service must be done by an authorized
Chrysler, Dodge, or Jeep dealer. We strongly recommend
that you take your vehicle to your selling dealer. They
know you and your vehicle best, and are most concerned
that you get prompt and high quality service. The
manufacturer’s dealers have the facilities, factory-trained
technicians, special tools, and the latest information to
assure your vehicle is fixed correctly and in a timely
manner.
This is why you should always talk to your dealer’s
service manager first. Most matters can be resolved with
this process.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
• If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the
general manager or owner of the dealership. They
want to know if you need assistance.
• If your dealership is unable to resolve the concern, you
may contact the Manufacturer’s Customer Center.
Any communication to the Manufacturer’s Customer
Center should include the following information:
• Owner’s name and address
• Owner’s telephone number (home and office)
• Dealership name
• Vehicle identification number
• Vehicle delivery date and mileage
DaimlerChrysler Motors Corporation Customer
Center
P.O. Box 21–8004
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Phone: (800) 992-1997
339
DaimlerChrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center
P.O. Box 1621
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Phone —(800) 465–2001
In Mexico contact:
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Mexico, D. F.
In Mexico (915) 729–1248 or 729–1240
Outside Mexico (525) 729–1248 or 729–1240
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the
manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommunication Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its Customer
Center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer who
has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter
(TTY) in the United States can communicate with the
manufacturer by dialing 1–800–380–CHRY.
9
340
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
Service Contract
You may have purchased a service contract for your
vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected repairs after your manufacturer’s new vehicle
limited warranty expires. The manufacturer stands behind only the manufacturer’s Service Contracts. If you
purchased a manufacturer’s Service Contract, you will
receive Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification Card
in the mail within three weeks of your vehicle delivery
date. If you have any questions about your service
contract, call the manufacturer’s Service Contract National Customer Hotline at 1-800-521-9922.
The manufacturer will not stand behind any service
contract that is not the manufacturer’s Service Contract. It
is not responsible for any service contract other than the
manufacturer’s Service Contract. If you purchased a
service contract that is not a manufacturer’s Service
Contract, and you require service after your manufacturer’s new vehicle limited warranty expires, please refer to
your contract documents, and contact the person listed in
those documents.
We appreciate that you have made a major investment
when you purchased your new vehicle. Your dealer has
also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and
training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with
your ownership experience. You’ll be pleased with their
sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related
concerns.
WARRANTY INFORMATION (U.S. Vehicles Only)
See the Warranty Information Booklet for the terms and
provisions of DaimlerChrysler’s warranties applicable to
this vehicle.
MOPAR姞 PARTS
Mopar威 fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are
available from your dealer. They will help you keep your
vehicle operating at its best.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
In the 50 United States and Washington D.C.: If you
believe that your vehicle has a defect, which could cause
a crash or cause injury or death, you should immediately
inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the manufacturer.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your dealer, and the
manufacturer.
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
Hotline toll free at 1–888–327–4236 (TTY: 1–800–424–
9153), or go to http://www.NHTSA.gov. or write to:
NHTSA, U.S. Dept. of Transportation, Washington DC
20590. You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from the Hotline.
341
In Canada:
If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you
should contact the Customer Service Department immediately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety
defect to the Canadian government should write to
Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations
and Recalls, 2780 Sheffield Road, Ottawa, Ontario K1B
3V9.
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
To order the following manuals, you may use either the
website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Mastercard, American Express, and Discover orders are accepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call
for an order form.
NOTE: A street address is required when ordering
manuals. (No P.O. Boxes).
9
342
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
• Service Manuals.
These comprehensive service manuals provide the
information that students and professional technicians
need in diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving,
maintaining, servicing, and repairing DaimlerChrysler
Corporation vehicles. A complete working knowledge
of the vehicle, system, and/or components is written
in straightforward language with illustrations, diagrams, and charts.
• Diagnostic Procedure Manuals.
Filled with diagrams, charts and detailed illustrations,
these practical manuals make it easy for students and
technicians to find and fix problems on computercontrolled vehicle systems and features. They show
exactly how to find and correct problems the first time,
using step-by-step troubleshooting and driveability
procedures, proven diagnostic tests and a complete list
of all tools and equipment.
• Owner’s Manuals.
These manuals have been prepared with the assistance
of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you
with specific Chrysler group vehicles. Included are
starting, operating, emergency and maintenance procedures as well as specifications, capabilities and
safety tips.
Call Toll Free at:
• 1–800–890–4038 (U.S.)
• 1–800–387–1143 (Canada)
Or
Visit us on the World Wide Web at:
• www.techauthority.daimlerchrysler.com
• www.daimlerchrysler.ca/manuals
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
343
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following describes the tire grading categories established by the National highway Traffic Safety Administration. The specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s
manufacturer in each category is shown on the sidewall
of the tires on your car.
Traction Grades
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B,
and C. Those grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on
wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions
on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and
concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.
All Passenger Car Tires Must Conform to Federal Safety
Requirements in Addition to These Grades.
WARNING!
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the
wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and a half (1
1/2) times as well on the government course as a tire
graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends
upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and
may depart significantly from the norm due to variations
in driving habits, service practices and differences in road
characteristics and climate.
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or
peak traction characteristics.
9
344
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
Temperature Grades
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat
and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all
passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test
wheel than the minimum required by law.
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is established for
a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, under inflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause
heat buildup and possible tire failure.
INDEX
10
346
INDEX
ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . 289
Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104,106,285
Adjustable Pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Air Cleaner, Engine
(Engine Air Cleaner Filter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Air Conditioning Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189,283
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Air Conditioning Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . 282,283
Air Conditioning System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183,282
Air Pressure, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141,230
Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Airbag Deployment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42,44
Airbag Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43,46,58,137
Airbag Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Airbag, Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Airbag, Window (Side Curtain) . . . . . . . . . . . 38,43
Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Alarm System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Alignment and Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Antenna, Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . 288,289,313
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . 211,214
Anti-Lock Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137,213
Anti-Theft Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) . . . . . . 15
Anti-Theft System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Auto Down Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Auto Up Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Automatic Dimming Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22,23
Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) . . . . . . . 183
Automatic Transaxle
Special Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . 203,294,295
Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295,315
Autostick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Fluid and Filter Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Fluid Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Fluid Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
INDEX
Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Special Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Autostick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205,207
Ball Joints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Emergency Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Keyless Transmitter Replacement (RKE) . . . . . 19
Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263,281
Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Belts, Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Belts, Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Body Mechanism Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
B-Pillar Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Brake Control System, Electronic . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Brake, Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211,292
Anti-Lock (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211,214
Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293,315
Hoses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Master Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
347
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138,211
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Brake/Transmission Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Break-In Recommendations, New Vehicle . . . . . . 55
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Bulbs, Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Calibration, Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Capacities, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Caps, Filler
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Radiator (Coolant Pressure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Car Washes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Carbon Monoxide Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56,248
Cassette Tape and Player Maintenance . . . . . . . 181
Catalytic Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
CD (Compact Disc) Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Cellular Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Chart, Tire Sizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
10
348
INDEX
Check Engine Light
(Malfunction Indicator Light) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47,49,52,53
Child Restraint Tether Anchors . . . . . . . . . . . 50,52
Child Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Clean Air Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Cleaning
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Climate Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157,160,171
Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Compass Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Compass Variance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Computer, Trip/Travel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Console, Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Console, Overhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Contract, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) . . . . . . . . 289
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Coolant Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Coolant Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287,290
Disposal of Used Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Drain, Flush, and Refill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Points to Remember . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Pressure Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Radiator Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . 288,313,314
Cruise Control (Speed Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Cruise Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Cup Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126,299
Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Data Recorder, Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Daytime Running Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Dealer Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Defroster, Rear Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Defroster, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58,187
Delay (Intermittent) Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Diagnostic System, Onboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Dimmer Switch, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
INDEX
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Door Locks, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Door Opener, Garage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Drive Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Driving
On Slippery Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
DVD Player (Video Entertainment System) . . . . 174
Electric Remote Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Electrical Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Electronic Brake Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . 109
Electronic Stability Program (ESP) . . . . . . . . . . 216
Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light . . . . . 141
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) . . 144
Emergency, In Case of
Freeing Vehicle When Stuck . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Emission Control System Maintenance . . . . 273,318
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
349
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Block Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Checking Oil Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287,314
Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56,248
Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Flooded, Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246,313
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275,313,314
Oil Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Oil Filler Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Oil Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277,313
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Enhanced Accident Response Feature . . . . . . . . . 45
Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Event Data Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56,57,248,286
Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56,286
Exterior Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
10
350
INDEX
Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Filters
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189,283
Engine Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278,314
Engine Oil Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Flashers
Hazard Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98,136
Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Flooded Engine Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Floor Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Fluid Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Fluid Leaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Fluid Level Checks
Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Fluids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts . . . . . . . . 314
Fog Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98,136
Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Front Suspension Ball Joints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Front Wheel Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Hoses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Octane Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246,314
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246,313
Tank Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Fuel System Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Fueling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Garage Door Opener (HomeLink威) . . . . . . . . . . 116
INDEX
Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249,272
Gasoline, Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Gasoline, Reformulated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Gauges
Coolant Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15,20,245
Glass Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Gross Axle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Ground Clearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
GVWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Hands-Free Phone (UConnect™) . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Headlight Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105,285
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
High Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
351
High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch . . . . . . . 99
Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
On With Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96,102
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Time Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105,285
Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Heated Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Heater, Engine Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
High Beam/Low Beam Select
(Dimmer) Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Holder, Cup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
HomeLink威
(Garage Door Opener) Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . 116
Hood Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Hoses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291,292
Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ignition Key Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Immobilizer (Sentry Key) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11
11
11
17
12
10
352
INDEX
Infant Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47,48
Inflation Pressure Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Information Center, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135,136
Instrument Panel and Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Interior Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Interior Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers) . . . . . . . . . 101
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Jump Starting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Key, Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Key, Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Key, Sentry (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Key-In Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Keyless Entry System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Knee Bolster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14
13
12
12
17
11
38
Lane Change and Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
LATCH
(Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren) . . . 50,52
Latch Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Latches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Lead Free Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58,95
Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43,46,58,137
Anti-Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137,213
Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Brake Assist Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Brake Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138,211
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Courtesy/Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99,115
Cruise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Daytime Running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Dimmer Switch, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98,99
Electronic Stability Program
(ESP) Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Electronic Throttle Control Warning . . . . . . . 141
Engine Temperature Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
INDEX
Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98,136
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95,307
Headlights On With Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . 96,102
High Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99,140
High Beam Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95,136
Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100,115
License . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Low Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Low Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) . . . . . . 143
Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Service Engine Soon
(Malfunction Indicator) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
SmartBeams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
353
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) . . . . . . . 141,239
Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98,136
Vanity Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Warning (Instrument Cluster Description) . . . 136
Load Leveling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Loading Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252,253
Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Auto Unlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Child Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Low Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Lower Anchors and Tether for
CHildren (LATCH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50,52
Lubrication, Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Lumbar Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Maintenance Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
10
354
INDEX
Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
Schedule “A” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Schedule “B” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Malfunction Indicator Light
(Check Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143,273
Manual, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
Memory Feature (Memory Seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Memory Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Memory Seats and Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Mini-Trip Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Electric Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Exterior Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Vanity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Monitor, Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Mopar Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274,340
MTBE/ETBE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Multi-Function Control Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Navigation Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Navigation System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
New Vehicle Break-In Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Oil, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275,314
Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278,314
Filter Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Materials Added to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277,313
Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277,313
Onboard Diagnostic System . . . . . . . . . . . . 272,273
Opener, Garage Door (HomeLink威) . . . . . . . . . 116
Operating Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Outside Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
INDEX
Overhead Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) . . . . . . . . . 341
Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Park Assist System, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Parking On Hill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Passing Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Pedals, Adjustable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Personal Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Phone, Cellular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Phone, Hands-Free (UConnect™) . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Placard, Tire and Loading Information . . . . . . . 225
Power
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Distribution Center (Fuses) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) . . . . . . . . 124
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213,284
355
Steering, Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column . . . . . . . . . 107
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Pregnant Women and Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Pretensioners
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Programmable Electronic Features . . . . . 117,120,153
Programming Transmitters
(Remote Keyless Entry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19,117,120
Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) . . . . . . . . 289
Radio Broadcast Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Radio, Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159,183
Radio Remote Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Radio, Satellite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171,176
Radio (Sound Systems) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Rain Sensitive Wiper System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Rear Park Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Rear Seat, Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
10
356
INDEX
Rear Window Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Reclining Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Recorder, Event Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Recreational Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Reminder, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls . . . . . . 179
Remote Trunk Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
Restraint, Head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Restraints, Child . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Restraints, Occupant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Rocking Vehicle When Stuck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Safety
Safety
Safety
Safety
Checks Inside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Checks Outside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Defects, Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
Information, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171,176
Satellite Radio Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Schedule, Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
Seat Belt Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage . . . . . . 34
And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47,48,49,53
Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Front Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30,31
Operating Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Untwisting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Easy Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Lumbar Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
INDEX
Rear Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Reclining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . 15,140
Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . 288,314
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Service Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
Service Engine Soon Light
(Malfunction Indicator) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Service Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
Setting the Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157,160,171
Settings, Personal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199,203
Shoulder Belt Upper Anchorage . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Side Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Signals, Turn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98,136
Slippery Surfaces, Driving On . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
SmartBeams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Spark Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
357
Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Engine Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Starting and Operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Steering
Column Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Linkage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213,284
Tilt Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Wheel, Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Steering Wheel Mounted
Sound System Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127,306
Storage, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188,306
Storing Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
Sun Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Sunglasses Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Supplemental Restraint System - Airbag . . . . . . . 38
System, Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
10
358
INDEX
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Telescoping Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) . . . . . . . 183
Temperature Gauge, Engine Coolant . . . . . . 139,257
Tether Anchor, Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Theft Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Theft System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Tilt Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Tire and Loading Information Placard . . . . . . . 225
Tire Identification Number (TIN) . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
TIREFIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58,229,343
Aging (Life of Tires) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Air Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Load Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225,226
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . 239
Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
Radial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220,229
Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Behind a Motor Home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Recreational . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Trailering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Towing Vehicle Behind a Motor Home . . . . . . . 254
Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203,294
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
INDEX
Transmitter Battery Service
(Remote Keyless Entry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Transmitter, Garage Door
Opener (HomeLink威) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Transmitter Programming
(Remote Keyless Entry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Transmitter, Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . 17
Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Trunk Release, Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Trunk Release Remote Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98,136
UConnect™ (Hands-Free Phone) . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Uniform Tire Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
Universal Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Unleaded Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Vanity Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Variance, Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Vehicle Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
359
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . 6
Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226,252,253
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188,306
Vehicle Theft Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . 15
Video Entertainment System
(Rear Seat Video System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Warning Flasher, Hazard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Warning Lights
(Instrument Cluster Description) . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Warnings and Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
Washer, Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104,106,285
Washers, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Washers, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102,285
Washing Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Wheel Alignment and Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Wheel and Wheel Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Wheel and Wheel Trim Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Wheel Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27,123
Window Airbag (Side Curtain) . . . . . . . . . . . . 38,43
10
360
INDEX
Window Fogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Windshield Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101,102,285
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Windshield Wiper Blades
Windshield Wipers . . . . .
Wiper Blade Replacement
Wipers, Intermittent . . . .
Wipers, Rain Sensitive . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
285
101
285
101
102